GMC 1997 Sierra 1500 Owner's Manual

GMC 1997 Sierra 1500 Owner's Manual
1 1
';.
The 1997 GMC Sierra Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR’ system.
2- 1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3- 1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4- 1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road andhow to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact GMC for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page8- 10.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
F
p!l
We support voluntary
technician certification.
CERTIFIED
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATIONTHROUGH
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC,
the GMC Emblem and the nameSIERRA are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
c
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed.We reserve the rightto make changes
in the product after that time without further notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.If you
sell the vehicle, pleaseleave this manual in itso the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
X9704 B First Edition
ii
For Canadian Owners Who Prefera
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, OntarioL5T 1C7
@Copyright General Motors Corporation1996
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle.If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In thismanual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work togetherto explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this
book.
We use a box and the word CAUTIONto tell you
about things that could hurtyou if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index
A LAUTION:
I
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of
what’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you whatto do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read thesecautions. If you don’t, you or
others could behurt.
iii
--
. -.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through itin
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area,we tell you about something thatcan
damage your vehicle. Many times,
this damage would
not be coveredby your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might
see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words,CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
CAUSTIC
BAllERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAllERY
qJ/,
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
e
A
BAllERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
BRAKE
COOLANT
-
DAYTIME
RUNNING *
LAMPS * * '
FOG LAMPS
COOLANT
TEMP
0
$0
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN
c
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
-I-1
FUSE
LIGHTER
(a)
a
HORN
SPEAKER
e,
FUEL
e
)cr
b
la
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers thesemodels:
Crew Cab
Regular Cab Pickup
Chassis Cab
Extended Cab Pickup
3500 HD Chassis Cab
vi
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll findinformation about the seats in your vehicle and howto use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should nut do with air bags and safetybelts.
1-2
1-9
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-32
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts - - and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System
Center Passenger Position
1-34
1-40
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides for Children
and Smaller Adults
1-43
Children
1-45
Child
Restraints
1-62
Larger Children
1-65
Safety
Belt
Extender
1-65
Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-65
Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter
a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold themup and down. Italso tells you about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
If your vehicle hasa manual
bucket, split bench or full
bench seat, you can adjust it
with this lever at the front
of the seat.
Manual Front Seat
A -CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
is
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you
push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the lever at thefront of the seat towardthe
passenger’s sideto unlock it. Using yourbody, slide the
seat to whereyou want it. Then, release the lever and try
to move the seat with your body in order to make sure
the seat is locked into place.
Power Driver’s Seat(Option)
You can use the round center knob to move the seat to
where you want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up.
To lower the seat, move the knobdown. To move the
seat forward, move the knob towardthe frontof the
vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the knob
toward the rear of the vehicle.
You can also raise and lower thefront and rear of
the seat. To raise the front of the seat, move the front
lever up. To lower the front of the seat, move the front
lever down. To raise the rearof the seat, move the rear
lever up. To lower the rearof the seat, move the rear
lever down.
If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s side, you
can adjust it with these controls at the outside edge of
the seat.
1-3
Power Lumbar Control
Reclining Seatbacks
If you have power lumbar
adjustment, you can
increase or decrease lumbar
support in an areaof the
lower seatback.
To increase support, press and hold the
front of the
rocker switch. Letgo of the switch when the lower
seatback reaches the desired
level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the rear
of the
rocker switch. Letgo of the switch when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level
of support.
1-4
To adjust thefront seatback, move the lever rearward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Move the lever again rearward and the seatback will
go
to an upright position.
But don’t havea seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting ina reclined position when yourvehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t dotheir job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its because
job
it
won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap beltcan’t do its jobeither. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, notat your pelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the topof the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chanceof a neck injury ina crash.
To fold a front split bench
or bucket seatbackforward,
pull this lever forward and
fold the seatbackforward.
Seatback Latches
The front seatback of the base level bench seat folds
forward tolet you access the rear of the cab. Your
seatback will move back and forth freely, unless you
come to a sudden stop. Then it will lockinto place. If
you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed
not to fold forward. Access to
the rear of the cab is
available by using the rear doors.
The front seatback of split bench seat and bucketseats
fold forward to letyou access the rearof the cab.
To return the seatback to the upright position,
just push
the seatback rearward until itlatches. After returning the
seatback toits upright position, pullthe seatback
forward to make sureit is locked.
The rear seatbackof a rear bench seat without a center
armrest canbe folded forwardto let you reach the
area behind it. Your seatback will move back and forth
freely, unless you cometo a sudden stop. Then, it will
lock into place.
The Crew Cab rear seatbackwith a center armrest folds
forward to let you access the area behind it.
1-6
To fold a seatback forward,
pull this lever forward and
fold the seatback forward.
To return the seatback to the upright position, just push
the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback
forward to make sure it is locked.
Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only)
The manual driver and passengerfront bucket seat and
the manual 60/40 split bench seat of your vehicle have
an easy entryfeature. This makes it easy to get in
the power
and out of the rear seat. On vehicles with
driver’s seat, only the front passenger’s seat has the
easy entry feature.
I”
To operate the seat, pull
forward on thetop of this
lever and tilt the back
forward towardthe front
of the vehicle.
A CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearwardon the seatback to be sure
it
is locked.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or
push the seat forwarduntil it stops.
1-7
I
To return the seat to its regular position, return the
Rear Seat (ExtendedCab)
seatback to its upright position, then push
the whole seat
rearward until it latches.
Folding theRear Seat
After returning the seatto its regular position, try to
move the seat with your body in order to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
The extended cab may have a rear folding seat
which can be folded open
for more seating space.
To use the seat:
1. Pull the entire seat forward until it is flat.
If any easyentry seat isn’t locked,it can move. In
a sudden stopor crash, the person sittingthere
could be injured. And, even
if there is no crash or
sudden stop,a driver sitting in an unlocked easy
entry seat could bestartled by the sudden
movement and hit the wrong controlor pedal,
causing an accident. Afteryou’ve used it, be sure
to pushrearward on any easy entry seat tobe
sure it is locked.
1-8
2. Then pull forward on
the
RELEASE lever under
the seat cushion, onthe
passenger’s sideof the
rear seat. Push the
seatback rearward until
it latches.
3. After pushing the seatback uprightinto position, pull
the seatback forwardto make sure it is locked.
The extended cab's rear seat canalso be folded up to
provide more cargo space. To fold the seat:
1. Pull forward on the RELEASE lever at the side of
the seat cushion, behind the passenger's side front
seat. Fold the seatback forward until it latches with
the seat cushion.
2. Lift the entire seat and
push it rearward into
place.
3. Make sure the seat is secure.
Rear Seat (Crew Cab)
Safety Belts: They're for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should notdo
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
system, or air bag system.
A CAUTION:
-
-
Don't let anyoneride where heor she can't wear
a safety belt properly. Ifyou are in a crash and
you're not wearinga safety belt, yourinjuries
can be much worse.You can hit things inside
the
vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers' belts
are fastened properly too.
You can adjust the seat by sliding the lever at the front
of the seat toward the seat support to unlock it. Then,
slide the seat to where you want it. Release the lever and
try to move theseat with your body in order to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
1-9
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure
everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat andusing a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes onas a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light”in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says
to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never know if you’llbe in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t knowif it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashesare in between. In manyof them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than25 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle.Suppose it's just a seat
on wheels.
. .. .. . .
Get it up to speed. Thenstop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-12
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does.
You get more time tostop. You stop over moredistance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why
safety belts make such goodsense.
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk @
About SafetyBelts -- and the Answers
A:
@ Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearinga safety
belt or not. But you can unbucklea safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being consciousduring and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
If my vehicle has air bags,
why should I haveto
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them inthe future.But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offered for salehas required theuse
of safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not onlyin frontal collisions,
but especiallyin side andother collisions.
If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and
your passengers can behurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protectyou from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest numberof serious
injuries anddeaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 kmh).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
. ..
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
P‘
Adults
, ::
h
l
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Followthose rules for everyone’s
protection.
First, you’ll wantto know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it gettwisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.
Pull up on thelatch plate to make sureit is secure.
If the beltisn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-15
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
is right for you.
adjuster to the height that
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid underit, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
PRESS and move
To move it down, push in at the word
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go
the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of thethe adjuster upjust by pushing up on the shoulder belt
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want
it,
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash. try to move it down without pushing in to make itsure
has locked into position.
1-16
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away
from yourface and neck, but notfalling off your
shoulder.
&:
A:
What’s wrong with this?
’A
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
@'
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltis
buckled in the wrong place
like this. In a crash,
the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The
belt forceswould be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Always buckle your beltinto thebuckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
I
n
You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltgoes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high.In a crash,you can slideunder the belt.
The belt forcewould then be appliedat the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones,and that could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-19
@
What’s wrong with this?,
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
In a crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm.
body would move too far forward,which would
increase the chanceof head andneck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones.
You could alsoseverely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt. In
of the
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
belt to spread impact forces.aIfbelt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly,or ask
your dealerto fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy
'
I
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injuredif they don't wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, besure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the dooron it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,ana
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.
1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurtin a crash. For
pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safetybelt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
Wheri the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock.
(This is the child restraint locking feature working
normally.) If the belt locks, let it go back all the way
and start again.
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
system or air bag system.
Your vehicle may have an
air bag for the driver and
another air bag for the
right front passenger. If
it does, it will say
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint on the middle
part of the steering wheel.
1-23
~
Here are the most important thingsto know about the air
bag system:
A CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed ina crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but donY replace them.Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate
to severe
crashes where the
front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all
in rollover, rear, side
or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear
a safety belt properly whether or not there’s
an airbag for thatperson.
--
--
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the
an inflating
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position beforeand during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
air
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
An inflating air bag can seriouslyinjure small
children. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children”and the cautionlabel on the
right front passenger’s safety belt.
I
1-24
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.
How the Air Bag SystemWorks
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tells youif there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”in the Index
for more information.
Where are the airbags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
A CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
or it
might force the object into
that person. Thepath
of an inflating air bag must be kept
clear. Don’t
put anything betweenan occupant andan air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the .
steering wheel hub or on or near any otherair
bag covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’sside.
1-26
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goesstraight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold levelis
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, thethreshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed toinflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair
bag should haveinflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator,which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the rightfront passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel
or the instrument panel.Air bags supplement the
protection providedby safety belts. Air bagsdistribute
the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s
upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.But
air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more thana supplement to safety belts,
and then onlyin moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you seeafter an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize the
air bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag
module -- the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s air bag,
or the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for ashort time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not
too hot to touch. Therewill be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from seeingor from
being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it stoppeople
from leaving the vehicle.
A CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there
is dust in theair.
This dustcould cause breathing problems for
people with a historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone inthe
vehicle should get out as soon as itis safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t
get out
of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get
fresh airby opening awindow or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be thereto help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing
and diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system,
when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety
belt usage at deployment.
Unless you have a Crew Cab, your vehicle has a
switch on the instrument panel that you canuse to
turn off the passenger’s air bag. But usethis switch
only when you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint at the rightfront passenger’s position. See
“Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat
Position” in the Indexfor more on this, including
important safety information.
A CAUTION:
If the right frontpassenger’s air bag is turned
off, an adult or child
a
who is no longeran infant
sitting in the right front passenger’s position
won’t have the extra protection
of an airbag. In
a crash, the air bag
wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Make
sure the air bag
is turned onunless you are using
a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front
seat position.
,
I
Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bagsystem.Improperservicecan
mean thatyour
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
~
I
If you damage thecovering for the driver’sor the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace theair
bag module in the steering
wheel or both theair
bag module and the instrument panel for the
passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air
bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag system in several places
to
around your vehicle.You don’t want the system
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and
the air bag system.To
purchase a service manual,see “Service and Owner
Publications’’ in the Index.
For up to10 minutes after the ignition
key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate uring improper service. You
can be injured if yo are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof
the air bag system. Be sure tofollow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work foryou is qualified to do so.
6
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-30
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
&.’ If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack
to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
e.’Is
e.’
What if I add a snow plow?Will it keep the air
bags from working properly?
A:
We’ve designed our air bag systems to work
of conditions,
properly under a wide range
including snow plowing with vehicles equipped
with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package(RPO
VYU). But don’t change or defeat the snow plow’s
“tripping mechanism.” If you do, it can damage
it may cause
your snow plow and your vehicle, and
an air bag inflation.
there anythingI’mightadd to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keepthe air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate anyof the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before
you
modifyyourvehicle.(Thephonenumbersand
.
addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Twoof
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Custotner Satisfaction Procedure”in the Index.)
1-31
Center Passenger Position
I
Lap Belt
If your vehiclehas front and rearbench seats, someone
can sitin the center positions.
1-32
Rear (Extended andCrew Cab)
Front (All)
When you sit in a centerseating position, you have alap
safety belt, which hasno retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along thebelt.
Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)
1-33
1 Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers
to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash, And they can strikeothers
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab)
Front (All)
To make the belt shorter, pull itsfree end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, positionand release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender”at the endof this section.
Make sure the release buttonon the buckle is positioned
so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
If you have a Crew Cab, see “Rear Seat Outside
Passenger Positions (Crew Cab)” laterin this section.
Lap-Shoulder Belt (Extended Cab)
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wearone properly.
. .
I
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle,tilt the latch
plate and keep pulling until you
can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate
to make sure it is secure.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender’’ at the endof this section.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever hadto.
1-35
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up
on the shoulderpart.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid underit, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there's a sudden stop or a crash.
1-36
-
A CAUTION:
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Crew Cab)
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
If you have an Extended Cab,see “Rear Seat
Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab)”
earlier in this section.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
Lap-Shoulder Belt (Crew Cab)
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s howto wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it issecure.
When the lap belt is pulled outall the way, it
will lock. If it does,,.letit go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release buttonon the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever hadto.
1, Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
1-38
force to the strong pelvic bones.And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest.
These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locksonly if there’s a sudden stopor
a crash.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
=1
You can beseriously hurtif your shoulder beltis
too loose.In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If your vehicle hasa rear seat, your vehicle may have
shoulder belt comfort guides.
This feature will provide
added safety belt comfort
for children who have
outgrown child restraints andfor small adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the
belt away from the neckand head.
There is one guidefor each outside passenger positionin
for
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
children who have outgrown child restraints and
for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how toinstall a comfort guide
and use the safetybelt:
To unlatch the belt,just push the button onthe buckle.
1-40
I
I
I
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of
the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and pastthe belt. The elastic
cord must be under thebelt. Then, place the guide
over thebelt, and insert the twoedges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-41
-
I
i
1
1
I
1
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elasticcordmustbeunderthebeltandthe
guide on top.
1-42
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab)”or “Rear Seat Outside Passenger
Positions (Crew Cab)” earlier in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the belt
before you fold a rear seat down or use an easy-entry
seat, if your vehicle hasone.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
/I\
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should
always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint
will say whether it is
the right type andsize for yourchild. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay
low on thehips, as it
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be over the
would apply
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
So, be sure that
cause serious or fatal injuries.
is always properly
any child small enough for one
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force
on your arms. The baby
would be almost
impossible to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
Never hold a baby in yourarms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crasha baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-44
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reducethe chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
Where to Put the Restraint
(Except Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
center or right front passenger seat. If your vehicle has
air bags and you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat, you need to
turn off the passenger’s air bag. See “Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position“ in the Index
for more on this, including important safety information.
I
--
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
off the air
the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn
bag before using arearfacing child restraint in
the right front seat position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-45
Where to Put the Restraint
(Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We at
General Motors therefore recommend thatyou put your
child restraint in the rear seat,if your vehicle hasone.
If you have a Crew Cab, never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here’s why:
I
A child in a rear-facing childrestraint canbe
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s
air baginflates. This is because the back
of a
rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to
the inflating air bag. If you have a Crew Cab,
always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in the
rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right frontseat. Beforeyou secure
a forward-facing child restraint, always
move the
front passenger seat as far back will
as itgo. Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear
seat.
If you have an Extended Cab, your vehicle has a switch
on the instrument panel thatyou can use to turn off the
you
passenger’s air bag. But use this switch only when
want to secure a rear-facing child restraint at the right
front passenger’s position.See “Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position”in the Index
for more on this, including important safety information.
Top Strap
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the backof a
rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to
off the air
the inflatingair bag. Be sure to turn
bag before using a rear-facing child restraintin
the right front seat
position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mindthat an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tellyou
how to do it.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab)
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the
lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If you have a Crew Cab,
see “Securing a Child Restraint
in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab)” later in
this section.
I
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
I
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-48
to adjust the beltif needed. If the
Tilt the latch plate
shoulder belt goes in front
of the child’s face or neck,
put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt,pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on thechild restraint.
Make sure the buckle end
of the belt is pulled out all
the way.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the childrestraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt andlet it go back all the way.The safety belt
will move freely again and
be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear
Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab)
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
or around
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face or neck, put
it behind the child restraint.
If you have an Extended Cab, see “Securing a Child
Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Extended
Cab)” earlier in this section.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strapif the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2 . Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
1-50
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of thelap belt all theway out of the
retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed thelap belt back into the
retractor while you push down
on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt andlet it go back all theway. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraintin a
Center Seat Position
You'll be using the lap belt.
See the earlier part aboutthe top strapif tbe child
restraint has one.
1-52
Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint.The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
Front (All)
1. Make the belt as longas possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
Rear (Extended and Crew
Cab)
3. Secure the child in the child restraintas the
instructions say.
1-53
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place in the vehicle and
contact thechild restraint makerfor their advice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (Crew Cab)
Front (All)
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6 . To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint.
1-54
Your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s
why:
A child in arearfacing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure rearfacing
a
child restraint in the rear seat.
4. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show youhow.
of the child’s face or
If the shoulder belt goes in front
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the topstrap if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air
bag, always move the seat as
far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-55
6. Pull the rest of the lap belt all theway out of the
retractor to set the lock.
7. To tighten the belt, feed thelap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on child
the restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt andlet it go back all the way.The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (Except Crew Cab)
I
If your vehicle has air bags, there
is a switch onthe
instrument panel that youcan use to turn off the right
front passenger's air bag. But use this switch only when
you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint
at the
right front passenger's position.
A child in arearfacing child restraint can
be seriously injured if the right front
passenger's air bag inflates. Thisis because
the back of a rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-57
I
CAUTION: (Continu
Be sure to turnoff the air bag before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
seat position.
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert
your ignition keyinto the switch, push in, and move
the switch to AIR B A G OFF.
The AIR BAG OFF light will come onto let you know
that the right front passenger’sair bag is off. The right
front passenger’sair bag will remain off until you turn it
back on again, andthe AIR B A G OFF light will stay on
to remind you that the air bag is off.
A CAUTdN:
If the air bagreadiness light ever comes on
when
you have turnedoff the airbag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag
system.
The right frontpassenger’s air bagcould inflate
even though the switchis off. If this ever
happens, don’t securea rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle until you have your
vehicle serviced.
I
1-58
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. If your vehicle hasair bags and you are using a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure the
air bag is turned off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, always move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing it in this seat. (See “Seats”
in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-59
6. Pull the restof the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-60
7. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to besure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let itgo back all the way.The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
If your vehiclehas air bags, turn on the right front
passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facing
child restraint.
.
..
:
.
I
/I\
CAUTION:
If the right frontpassenger’s air bag is turned
off, an adult ora child who is no longer an infant
sitting in the right front passenger’s position
won’t have the extra protection
of an air bag. In
a crash, theair bag wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Make
is turned onunless you are
sure the air bag
using a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seatposition.
To turn the air bag on again, insert your ignition key
into the switch, pushin, and move the switchto the
ON position.
1-61
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next
to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they needto use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safetybelts.
1-62
I
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a
crash, thetwo children canbe crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be usedby
only one personat a time.
What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
is
but thechild is so small that the shoulder belt
very close to thechild’s faceor neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulderbelt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have therestraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder beltis still very
close to the child’sface or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that hasa lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here a childis sitting in a seat that has a
is behind
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part
way, in
the child. If the child wears the belt in this
a crash thechild might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. Thatcould cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the
lap portion of the belt
should be wornlow and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-64
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
to fasten, your
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough
dealer will orderyou an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the
extender will be long enough foryou. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat itis made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see
anything that might keepa safety belt system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts maynot protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had acrash, do you need new belts?
After a very minorcollision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts werestretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts andrepairs
may be necessaryeven if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll needto replace air bag
system parts. See the part on theair bag system earlier in
this section.
&
1-66
NOTES
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
-
Here you can learnabout the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Alsoexplained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2- 1
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-7
2-9
2- 10
2-11
2- 13
2- 14
2- 15
2- 19
2-22
2-22
2-27
2-28
2-30
Keys
Tailgate
Third Door
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System
Theft
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
Engine Coolant Heater
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission Operation
Locking Rear Axle
Four-wheel Drive
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission Models Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-36
2-36
2-43
2-48
2-52
2-59
2-6 1
2-62
2-64
2-66
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission Models Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn SignalAUultifunction Lever
Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays andCigarette Lighter
Sun Visors
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
CAUTION:
1
I
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
Tailgate
You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle
while pulling the tailgate toward you.
TOshut the tailgate, firmly pushit away from you into
the latch.
After you put thetailgate back up, pullit back toward
you, to besure that it latches securely.
Tailgate Removal
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will beable to
assist you with obtaining new ones.
The tailgate on your vehicle can
be removed to allowfor
different loading situations. Although the tailgate can
be
removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist
you with the removal to avoid possible finish damage.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside.You may even have to damage
So be sure you have an
your vehicle to get in.
extra key.
2-3
Third Door (IfEquipped)
To remove thetailgate:
Raise the tailgate
slightly and release both
retaining cable clips.To
release thecable clips,
lift the cableso it points
straight out and pushthe
cable clips forward.
4
I
I
I
With the tailgate at a
slight upward angle, pull
back on thetailgate at
the right edge and then
move the tailgate to
the right torelease
the left edge.
I
I
\
Reverse the above procedureto reinstall. Make sure the
tailgate is secure.
2-4
Your vehicle may be equipped with a third door that
allows easier access to the rear area
of an extended cab.
To open the third door, first open the passenger'sside
front door. Then, use the handle located on the
front
edge of the rear doorto open it.
You must close and latch the third door beforeyou can
close the front passenger door.
To lock thedoor from the
inside, slide the lever on
Door Locks
your door down.
A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors canbe dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doorsand fall out. When a door
is
locked, the inside handle
won't open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through anunlocked
door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle.
This maynot be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren'tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and
you will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
To unlock the door, slide the lever up.
There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.
From the outside, use your keyor the Keyless Entry
System, if your vehicle has this option.
2-5
Power DoorLocks (If Equipped)
Zear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab)
With this feature, you can
lock therear doors so they
can’t be opened from the
inside by the passengers.
Press the bottomof the
power door lockswitch,
marked LOCK, on either
front door to lock all the
doors at once. Press the
ribbed side of the switchto
unlock all the doorsat once.
Move thelever up to engage the securityfeature.
Move the lever downto return the door locks to
normal operation.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locksfrom inside. Then getout and
close the door.
2-6
If your vehicle has thisoption, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entrytransmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
In addition, your interior lamps will be illuminated for a
set period of time when the transmitter signal is received
by the Keyless EntrySystem.
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See the
instructions that follow.
Your Keyless Entry Systemoperates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy
or snowy weather.
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not causeharmful interference, and
(2) this device must acceptany interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Takea few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and tryagain.
0
If you’re still having trouble, see your GM dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
Battery Replacement
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK
button.
If you press this button again withinfive seconds, all the
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
remaining doors (except the thirddoor) will unlock. The
interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. Ifyou have to
Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors (except the
third door).The interior lamps will comeon for two
seconds as soon as all the doorsare closed.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Each remote keylessentry transmitter is coded to
prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking yourvehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters
must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the
new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have
only four transmitters
matched to it.
2-8
get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it’s probably time to changethe battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
Use one three volt, typeCR2032, or equivalent battery.
To replace the battery:
Synchronization
Synchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the samesignal twice to the receiver.The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, standclose to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold theLOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least
five seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Theft
1 . Insert a small coin, or flathead screwdriver, to
separate the bottom ofthe transmitter from the top.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one,
making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is
facing down.
3. Snap the top and bottom together.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work,try
synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
Vehicle theft is bigbusiness, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we puton it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
~
~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~
~
~~
-~
~
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joy riders or professional thieves-- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding you
to remove your key
from the ignition and take
it with you. Alwaysdo this.
Your steering wheel willbe locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key out also locks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuablesout of sight.
Put them in a storage area,
or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lockupit and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What
if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
2-10
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the
long
run if you followthese guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at anyone speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
a Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings canmean
premature wear and earlier
replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guidelineevery
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.See
“Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.
--
--
Ignition Positions
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
You can use your key to turn yourignition switch tofive
different positions.
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned toLOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the positionfor driving.
START (E): This starts your engine.
IA
E
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things
like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. Push in thekey and turn
it towards you. Your steering wheel will remain locked,
just as it was before you inserted the key.
I
-
A CAUTIO1.;
On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer thevehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn theengine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn thekey only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.
2-11
I NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sureyou are using thecorrect key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
key or the
Using a tool to force it could break the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
I
Key Release Button
of manual transmiss~on
vehicles unless the key
release button is used.
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,
turn the keyto OFF, then press the button and turn the
key to LOCK. Do not hold the button in while turning
the key to OFF. Keeping your finger on the button, pull
the key straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key
to
LOCK and pull it straight out.
2-12
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
Manual Transmission
If you have a diesel engine, see“Starting Your Diesel
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL (N). Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
down -- that’s a safety feature.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When theengine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
I
NOTICE:
I
Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the
transmission. Shiftto PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
I
I
Holding your key in START
for longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause your battery to
be
drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can
damage yourstarter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, or until it starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
.A
In very cold weather,0°F
(- 18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater
can help.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever haveto have your vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to doit
without damagingyour vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
2-14
You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord,
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
I
How long should you keep thecoolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock.Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug
the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keepit away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehcle is equipped with an automatic transmission,
it now features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF, rather
than LOCK, there will be a small current drain on your
battery which could discharge your battery over
a period of time. If you have to leave your keyin the
ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is recommended
that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to
prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels.It’s the best
position to use when youstart your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have leftthe
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift leverto PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your
vehicle
will be free toroll even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) if your transfer case isin
case isin
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer
a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H)or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) not in
NEUTRAL (N). See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in
the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index.
--
--
--
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully
in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-16
I
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
r
~OTICE:
~~
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage yourtransmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle backand forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engineis “racing” (running athigh speed)is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople
or objects. Don’t shiftout of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused
by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty.
2-17
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@):This position is for
normal driving. Ifyou need more powerfor passing, and
you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
torque to the rear wheels when you are tryingto start your
vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lowerfuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on verysteep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shiftinto first
gear untilthe vehicle is going slowly enough.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
(a)
can be used when
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving onsteep
hills or for off-road driving. You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,a lower gear
selection if the transmissionshifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and
lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(a).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speedas you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use
your brakesoff and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2)’ the transmission will
drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing
2-18
NOTICE:
~
~~
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against
a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed (MW3 Transmission with Low
Gear) (If Equipped)
Here’s how to operate
your transmission:
only when the vehicle speed is below5 mph (8 km/h).
If you try to shift down into FIRST (1) at excessive
vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the
FIRST (1) position until vehicle speedis reduced.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal and shiftinto
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into SECOND (2) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come toa complete stop
and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into SECOND (2).
If you try to downshift into SECOND (2) at excessive
vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the
SECOND (2) positionuntil vehicle speed is reduced.
FIRST (1) is intended only for heavy loads and is not
recommended for normal driving.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start
your vehicle movingin FIRST (1). This allows clutch
components to break-in properly.
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into FIRST (1)
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal as you let upon
the accelerator pedal and shift into THIRD (3). Then,
slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into the higher
forward gears the same way you do for THIRD (3).
Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you pressthe
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, press the
to
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift
NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R):To back up, first press down the clutch
pedal. Wait about five seconds for the internal parts to
stop spinning and then shift
into REVERSE (R).
Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE(R), along with the parking brake,
when turning off yourengine and parking your vehicle.
2-20
5-Speed (MG5M50 Transmissions Without
Low Gear) (If Equipped)
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift
into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shiftinto FIRST (I), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST(1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shiftinto SECOND (2). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH(5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH ( 5 ) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let upon the clutch
pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on theaccelerator pedal and pressthe
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N):Use this position when youstart or
idle your engine.
Shift Speeds
A CAUTION:
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch
pedal. Wait about five seconds for the internal parts to
stop spinning and then,shift into REVERSE (R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, you couldlose control of your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift
down more than one gear when you downshift.
)NOTICE:
~~
Shift to REVERSE(R)only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE (R),along with the parking brake,
when turning off yourengine and parking your vehicle.
~
If your speed drops below20 mph (32 kmh), or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift
to
the next lower gear.You may have to downshift two or
more gears to keep theengine running smoothly or for
good performance.
2-21
Up Shift Light
Locking Rear Axle(If Equipped)
If you have a manual
transmission, you may have
a SHIFT light. Thislight
will show you when to shift
to the next higher gearfor
best fuel economy.
SHIFT
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you
additional traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most
of the time, but when
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other
does,
the lockingfeature will allow the wheel with tractionto
move the vehicle.
Four-wheel Drive(If Equipped)
When this light comes on, youcan shift to the next
higher gearif weather, road and traffic conditions
let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when thelight comes on.
If your vehicle has four-wheeldrive, you can send your
engine’s driving powerto all four wheels forextra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out
of four-wheel
drive, you mustbe familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel
drive. You
should use 2-WHEELHIGH (2H) for most normal
driving conditions.
While you accelerate,it is normal for the lightto go
on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore theSHIFT light when you downshift.
I NOTICE:
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and
is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard theSHIFT light
when the transfer caseis in 4L.
2-22
Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions for a long time
on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life
of
your vehicle’s drivetrain.
I
Front AxleLocking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you
shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to lock or
unlock is normal. If the outside temperature is very hot, or
the vehicle hasbeen used under hard driving conditions,
there may bea slight delay for the axle to unlock.
Manual Transfer Case(If Equipped)
The frontaxle portionof the indicator diagram willlight
up when you shift into four-wheel drive and the front
axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal. If the front axle light does not go out
immediately after you shift out of four-wheel drive,
have your dealer check your system.
An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer
case settings:
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of
the driver. Usethis lever to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
2-Wheel High (2H):This setting is for driving in most
street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
2-23
$-Wheel High (4H):This setting engages yourfront
you need
axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4H when
extra traction, suchas on wet or icy roads, orin most
off-road situations.
Neutral (N): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle
needs to be towed or when using a power take-off.
4-Wheel Low (4L): This setting also engages yourfront
axle to give you extra power and
also gives you a higher
driveline ratio. It should
be used only for off-road driving.
You can shift from 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H)
to 4-WHEEL
HIGH (4H) or from 4-WHEEL HIGH(4H) to
2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) while the vehicle is moving.
Your front axle willengage faster if you take your foot
off of the acceleratorfor a few seconds after you shift.
In extremely cold weather,it may be necessary to stop
or slow the vehicleto shift into 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H).
To shift into or outof 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) or
NEUTRAL (N):
1. Slow the vehicleto a roll, about 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 kmh) and shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission,
press the clutch pedal.
2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one
continuous motion.
Don’t pause in NEUTRAL(N) as you shift the transfer
case into 4-WHEEL LOW (4L),or your gears
could clash.
Remember that driving in 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or
Also,
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) may reduce fuel economy.
driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could
cause your tiresto wear faster and make your transfer
case harderto shift and run noisier.
When your headlampsor parking lamps are on,
rotate the thumb wheel next
to the headlamp switch
up to brighten or downto dim your transfercase
indicator light.
2-24
Electronic Transfer Case(If Equipped)
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give
you extra traction. You may never need4LO. It sends
the maximum power toall four wheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, thetransfer case switches are below and to
the left of the climate control system.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on theignition and the last chosen setting
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle infor service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is completed. If for some reason the transfer
cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last
chosen setting.
Shifting from2HI to 4HI
Shifting from4LO to 4HI or 2HI
Press and release the4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and thefront axle will lock automatically
with some delay.
To shift from 4LOto 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be
with the
stopped or moving less than3 mph (4.8 km/h)
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and releasethe 4HI
switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator lightto stop
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press andrelease the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically
with some delay.
Shifting from 2HIor 4HI to 4LO
To shift from2HI or 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL(N). The preferred method
for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the 4LO
switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop
flashing and remainilluminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicleis in
gear and/or moving,the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and notcomplete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slowerthan 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will return to 4HI.
2-26
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicleis in
gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light willflash for
30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift unless the
and the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h)
transmission is in NEUTRAL(N).
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with yourright foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with yourleft foot.
If the ignition is on,the brake system warning light will
come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down.
II NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle. Always check
to be sure
your parking brake is fully released before
you drive.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keepthe trailer from moving.
If you have a 3500 HD model, it is recommendedthat
the propshaft mounted parking brake be burnished as
part of the new vehicle break-in.The parking brake
will work bestafter it has been burnished following
these instructions.
Make 10 stops, using the parking brake foot pedal, from
20 mph (32 kmh)about 2 112 miles (4 km) apart. In
between stops, drive the vehicle at 20 mph (32 kmk).
If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased,
the brake system warning light will go off.
2-27
Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission Models Only)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P)position like this:
It can be danL *ous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK(P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, the
vehicle
can move suddenly. You or otherscould be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps
that follow. If youhave four-wheel drive and
your transfercase is in NEUTRAL (N), your
vehicle will be free toroll, evenif your shift lever
is in PARK (P).So, be sure the transfer case
is
in a drive gear not inNEUTRAL (N). If
you’re pulling a trailer,
see “Towing a Trailer”
in theIndex.
--
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-28
Pull the lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission
Models Only)
0
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer
case is in a drivegear -- not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
It can be dangerous leave
to your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. If you have
four-wheel drivewith a manual transfercase
shift lever and your transfer
case is in
NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free toroll,
even if your shift leveris in PARK (P).So be sure
the transfer caseis in a drive gear not in
NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, could
it
overheat andeven
catch fire. You or otherscould be injured. Don’t
leave your vehicle with the engine runningunless
you have to.
--
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicleis in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leaveit. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK
(P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shiftlever
wasn’t fully lockedinto PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill andyou don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This
is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours little
a
uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
2-30
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has a brake-transmissionshift interlock
system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition
is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK
(P), ease pressureon
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift leverto any gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift outof PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF,
2. Apply and hold the brake until theend of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle andshift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system
fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission Models Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual
transmission in REVERSE (R), turn off the engine, and
firmly apply the parking brake.
If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case
is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could rollif it isn’t.
If you are parking on a hill, or if you are pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
I
\
2-31
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better notto park with the engine running. But if
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust can
kill. It contains thegas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaustsystem had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately,
2-32
I
Idling the enginewith the airsystem control
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
‘(Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place
can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at thehighest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard.(See
“Blizzard” in the Index.)
--
--
A CAUTION:
It canbe dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even whenyou’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
PARK (P).
move the shift lever to
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL(N). Always
set your parking brake. Follow the proper
steps to be
sure your vehicle won’t move.See “Shifting Into
PARK (P)”in the Index.
Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crankon each door to raise or lower
manual windows.
Power Windows(If Equipped)
Regular and Extended Cab
If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
2-33
Press the rearof the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window.
Press the frontof the switch with the power window
symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s windowalso has an express down feature
that allows the windowto be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the
side of the window switch
marked AUTO for one second to activate the express
down mode. The express down mode can be canceled
at
any time by pressing the oppositeside of the switch.To
open the window partway, lightlytap the switch until the
window is at the desired position.
Crew Cab
If you have the optional power windows, the
controls
are on each of the side doors.
The driver’s door has a switch
for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned
to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2-34
Lockout Switch (Crew Cab)
If you have a CrewCab and power windows, the power
window switch has a lockout feature. This
feature
prevents therear windows from operating when the
front driver’sside switch is in LOCK. The windows can
still be operated using the driver’s window switch.
When the switch is moved
to NORM, the rear power
windows will operate again.
Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab)
To open a rear swing-out
window, just flip the
latch open and swing the
glass out.
Sliding Rear Window(If Equipped)
To open the sliding rear window, unlock thelatch lever
by moving the lever toward the driver’s side. Release
the lever from the latch plate and slide the window
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To close the window, slide the window toward the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch lever will
automatically snap locked on the latch plate. Try to open
the window withoutreleasing the latch lever to be sure
the window is in the locked position.
Horn
The latch will catch when the window is fully open and
hold the window inthe open position.
On air bag-equipped vehicles, press the air bag module
in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
On vehicles not equipped with an air bag,p s S the pad
in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
2-35
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
lhrn SignaVMultifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel before youdrive.
I
,
WIPER MIST-\
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room whenyou enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator,
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer,
WindshieldWipers,
Windshield Washer and
0
2-36
Cruise Control (If Equipped).
n r n Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normalrate, a signal bulb
may be burned out andother drivers may not see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
To signal a tum, move the lever all the way up or down.
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
When thetum is finished, the lever will return automatically.
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
direction of the turn or lane
To change the headlamps from low to high beam
or high
change.
to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
CII
When the high beamsare
on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
To signal a lane change, just raiseor lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when yourelease it.
2-37
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning theknob
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the knob to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one cycle.If you want morecycles, hold the
knob on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper eea ror a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the knob tochoose the delay time.The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
2-38
For steady wipingat low speed,turn the knobto the
LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turnthe knob
further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, movethe knob
to OFF.
Damaged wiper blades may preventyou from seeing
To avoid damage, besure to
well enough to drive safely,
clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new bladesor blade inserts.
Heavy ice or snow can overload your wipers.The
windshield wiper motoris protected from overloadby a
circuit breaker anda fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. Although protected fromelectrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc. may cause wiper
linkage damage. Alwaysclear ice and heavy snowfrom
the windshieldbefore using your windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
The use of a hood mounted air deflector may adversely
affect windshield wiper and washerperformance.
h CMJT,JN:
I
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Washer fluid will spray as longas you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop orreturn
to thepreset speed.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping yourfoot
on the accelerator. This can
really help onlong trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about
25 mph (40km/h).
When you apply yourbrakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
2-40
0
0
Cruise control canbe dangerous whereyou
can't drive safely at a steadyspeed. So,
don't use your cruise control on
winding
roads or in heavy traffk.
Cruise control canbe dangerous on
fast changes
slippery roads. On such roads,
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don't
use cruise control on slippery
roads.
Resuming a Set Speed
Setting Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply thebrake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to resetit.
If you leave your cruise control switch
on when
you9re not using cruise,
you might hita button
You
and go into cruise when you don’t want to.
could be startled and even lose control. Keep
the cruise control switchOFF until you want
to use it.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 k d h ) or more,
you can move thecruise
switch from ON to
RIA (Resume/Accelerate)
for about half a secQp4,
1. Move the cruise switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/Alonger than
half a second, the vehicle will keep goingfaster until
you release the switchor apply the brake.So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at WA.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two waysto go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to getto the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button andthe accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higherspeed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to
the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speedin
very small amounts, move the switch toR/A for less
than half a second. Each time youdo this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph ( I .6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button for less than halfa second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/hl slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Controlon Hills
How well your cruise controlwill work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.If the steepness
of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than
15 mph (24 km/h) below the set speed, your cruise control
will automatically disengage. When going downhill, you
may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out
of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much
trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
0 Step lightly on the brake pedal or
0 Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-42
Lamps
Taillamps,
LicensePlateLamps,
Instrument Panel Lights and
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Light
(Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles).
Rotate the knob clockwise again to the master lighting
symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well
as
the headlamps.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise toOFF to turn off
your lamps.
Your parking lamp and headlamp switch ison the
driver’s side of your instrument panel.
Rotate the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol
to turn on:
Rotate the thumbwheel next to the knob up to adjust
instrument panel lights.Rotate the thumb wheel up to
the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift
indicator LED displayto full intensity when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on.
You can switch your headlamps from high
to low beams
by pulling on the turn signal/multifunction lever.
ParkingLamps,
SidemarkerLamps,
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped),
2-43
Headlamps On Reminder
A buzzer will sound when your headlampsare turned
on and the keyis turned to the OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY position. Ifyou need to use your
headlamps when the key is turnedto OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY, the buzzer canbe turned off by turning
the thumb wheel nextto the parking lampheadlamp
knob all the way down.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can makeit easier for
others to see thefront of your vehicle during the
day. DRL canbe helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they canbe especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlampscome on at
a reduced brightness when:
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
the parking brake is released.
2-44
When the DRLare on, only your headlamps willbe on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t beon.
Your instrument panel won’tbe lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator lightis a
reminder to turn your headlamp switchon. The other
lamps thatcome on with your headlamps willalso
come on.
When you turn off the headlampswitch, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change
to
the reduced brightnessof DRL.
To idle your vehicle with theDRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turnon the regular
headlamp system when you need
it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy
or misty conditions. Your parking lamps and/or low-beam
headlamps must beon for your fog lampsto work.
The fog lamp switch ison
the lower edge of your
instrument panel.
Press the ribbed toppart of the switch to turn thefog
lamps on. Press the bottomof the switch to turn them
off. A light will glowin the switch when thefog lamps
are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in
the dark without turning on your headlamps.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beamsgo off, the
fog lamps will come onagain.
Interior Lamps
Front Reading Lamps(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has reading
lamps, press the button next
to the lampto turn the lamp
on. The lamps can be
adjusted to point in the
direction you want.
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
The instrument panelintensity control is locatedto the
right of the headlamp switch.
Rotate the thumb wheel
up to adjust instrument panel
lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up
to the first notch to
LED
return the radio display and gearshift indicator
display to full intensity when the headlamps
or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps (with the
vehicle doors closed)rotate the thumb wheel upto the
second notch position.
Illuminated Entry
Press the button againto turn the lamp off.
Your vehicle is equipped with
an illuminated entry feature.
Dome Lamps
When the doorsare opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome lamp button out.
is When all the doors
are closed, or the domelamp button is pressed in, the
lamps will stayon for ashort period of time and will
then go out.
The dome lamps will come
on when you open the doors.
2-46
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumb wheel, located next
to the parkingheadlamps
knob, all theway up to the second notch. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the
doors are opened or closed.
Cargo Lamp
Press the ribbed top partof
the switch to turn the cargo
lamp on. Press the bottom
of the switch to turn it off.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parkingheadlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doorsare
opened, or remain off. To turn the lampsoff, press the
button once. With the button in this position, the dome
lamps will remainoff when the doors are open.To
return the lamps to automaticoperation, press the button
again and return it to the “out” position. With the button
in this position,the dome lamps will come on when you
open the door.
The dome lamp switch must beon or one of the doors
open for the cargo lamp to work.
2-47
Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an electrochromicinside
rearview mirror.
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize
glare from lights behind
you after dark.
Press or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you afterdark.
The mirroralso includes an eight point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror
face. When on,
the compass automaticallycalibrates as the vehicle
is driven'.
Compass Operation
Press COMPto turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and thecompass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After twoseconds, the
mirror will display thecompass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on .the mirror as that maycause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show
a
Mirror Operation
The right side of the switch located at the bottom of the
mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. The
AUTO LED will come on when the electrochromic mirror
is turned on. To turn the mirror on, press and hold the
MIRROR button for three seconds. The mirror will darken
and remain dark until the button is released. To turn the
mirror off, press and release the MIRROR button.
compass heading (“N’ for North, for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a
similar magnetic item. If the letter “C” should ever
appear in the compass window, the mirror may
need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or
less until the display readsa direction, or
0
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set inzone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary toadjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if youlive outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as duringa long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic
north. If not adjustedto account for compass variance,
your compass could givefalse readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and holdthe COMP button for three seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2-50
4. Press the COMP button on the bottomof the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the buttonin, the display will
show a compass direction withina few seconds.
Outside Manual Adjust Mirror
Convex Outside Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrorsso you can just see the
a
view of objects
side of your vehicle and have clear
behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow doorways.
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
Select the mirroryou want
to move by moving the
center of the switch, located
on the driver’s doorarmrest,
to L (left) or R (right).
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Then, adjust the mirror angleby pressing the outer
arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where
you want it.
The use of hood mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect
mirror performance.
2-5 1
Storage Compartments
Center Overhead Console(If Equipped)
Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments
designed to store smallitems.
Your vehicle may have an overheadconsole. It has
storage compartments inside it.
Your vehicle includesa number of storage
compartments forstorage of often-used items.
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
in
the
instrument
panel.
Some vehicles have storage areas
compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener.
Use these spaces for items such as gloves or small books.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the
Some models have a storage pocket on each of the
compartment doorby pressing the release
front doors.
button forward.
Some vehicles havea storage area behind the seat.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
Glove Box
and loop patch. Pressit
To open your glove box, move the button toward the
firmly to the back of
passenger’s side and pull thedoor open.
your garage door opener,
as close to thecenter of
the opener as possible.
L
2-52
3. Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button, and press the opener firmly
into place.
The pegs inside the compartment door are used to
make sure the button on the compartment door will
contact the control button on the garage door opener.
4. Add one peg at a time
until the PUSH button
on the compartment
door operates the garage
door opener, with the
compartment door
closed, when you
press the button
marked PUSH.
5 . Now, with the
compartment door
closed, press the button
marked PUSH again
to make sure the
garage door opener
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right numberof pegs in place, you should only
have to press thePUSH button slightly to operate
the opener.
6. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and
add or removepegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
The center overhead compartmentcan be used to
conveniently store your sunglasses.
To open the center compartment, press the release
button located atthe rear of the compartment door.
Instrument Panel Cupholder
Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle
of the
instrument panel.
To use the cupholder, pull
the handle and slide the
cupholder tray open.
To close the cupholder,
slide it back into the
instrument panel.
R
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with
the
lenses facing out.
The rear compartment can be used to store a smallitem,
like a book.
To open the rear compartment, press the release button
located at the rearof the compartment door.
2-54
Center Console Storage Area
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a console compartment between
the bucket seats.
C
To open it, lift the latch handle and swing the door open.
Your console also has a
cupholder that swings out
for the back seat passengers
to use.
There is also a arawer that
slides out from the bottom
of the console.
2-56
Memo Pad Holder
Your vehicle may have a
memo holder attached tothe
front of the console. Use it
to hold pads of paper or
similar items.
Cassette/Compact Disc Storage
Your vehicle may havea
cassettekompact disc holder
at the front of the console.
The holder will store up to
four compact disc cases, up
to four cassette tape cases,
or any combination of these
items- that adds up
to four.
Armrest Storage Compartment
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may havea center armrest storage
compartment inthe front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press thelatch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
2-57
The storage compartment has cassettekompact
a
disc
holder. The holder will store up to five compact disc
cases and up to six cassette tape cases.
2-58
The storage compartment also has a folding writing
table on topof the armrest lid.
To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the
table and swing the writing table forward.
Use it to hold
a padof paper and a pen.
AshtraysandCigaretteLighter
Front
Ashtray
The front ashtray is located at the bottom of the instrument
panel. Pull on the notchin the ashtray door to open it.
To remove the front ashtray,
press the retainer spring
and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray,
place the bottom
part
of
ashtray
on
the
the bar
pivot
at
the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel.
Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position.
NOTICE:
If you store pa] or other things that burn
in your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
Do
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
2-59
Rear Ashtray (IfEquipped)
To use a rear ashtray,if you have them, pull at the top of
the ashtray door to flip the door open.
To remove a rear ashtray, press down on
the inside tabs
and open thedoor fully.
NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn
in your ashtrays, they
could be set on fire
by
could
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That
cause a fire and
possibly damage yourvehicle. Do
not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
2-60
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop backby itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in
with your hand
while it is heating can make it overload,
damaging the lighter and the heating
element.
Just push the lighter all the
way in and let go.
When it’s done, it will pop back by itself.
Accessory Power Outlets
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.You
can also swing them out to help block glare at the front
and side windows.
~
Your visor may have a strap to hold small items, such
as maps.
Some visors have an
extender on the inside edge.
When the visor is down,
pull the extender out for
extra glare coverage at the
front or side.
Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the
cigarette lighter. Use theseoutlets to power mobile
telephones or other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems.
Some visors have mirrors with lamps.
If the mirror has
lamps, they will come on when youlift the mirror cover.
2-61
Instrument Panel
2-62
A. Dome Lamp Switch
K. Ashtray
B. Lamp Controls
L. Cupholder
C. Air Outlets
M. Auxiliary Power Outlets
D. Multifunction Lever
N. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
E. Instrument Cluster
0. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped)
E Gearshift Lever
P. Passenger Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(Air Bag) Off Switch (If Equipped)
G . Audio System
Q. Tilt Lever (If Equipped)
H. Comfort Control System
R. Parking Brake Release
I.GloveBox
J. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (Air Bag)
(If Equipped)
S. HoodRelease
T. FuseBlock
2-63
--
Instrument Panel Cluster
CHECK
GAGES
SERVlCE
ENGINE
SOON
c
lolololo] TRIP
loo 0 0 oolol
APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK
United States version shown, Canada similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed tolet you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're
going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you'll need to know to drive safely and economically.
2-64
Speedometer and Odometer
Wip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
The trip odometer can tell youhow far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
TamperResistant Odometer
Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will
show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries
to turn it back.
You may wonder what happensif your vehicle needsa
new odometer installed. If the new odometer can be set
to the mileage total of the old odometer, thenit must be.
But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the oldmileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
To reset the trip odometer, fully pressthe reset button
located near the tripodometer readout. If the reset
button is not fully pressed, thetrip odometer may not go
all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may haveto
press the reset button againto reset the readoutto zero.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
I NOTICE:
On vehicles with a manual transmission,if you
operate the engine with the tachometer in the
red
area, your engine or other parts could
be damaged.
Damage to your engineor vehicle caused by
operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered
by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the
engine with the tachometer in the red area.
2-65
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong beforeit becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to
your warninglights and gages couldalso save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on whenthere may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’sfunctions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
2-66
Gages canindicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work togetherto let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows
there may be a problem, checkthe section thattells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’sadvice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warninglights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turnedto RUN or START, a tone will
come on for about eight seconds to remind peopleto
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stayon
for about 20 seconds,
then it willflash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel,
which shows AIR BAG. The system checks theair bag’s
electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the air bag sensors, theair bag module, the wiring and the
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “AirBag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for afew
seconds. Thenthe light
should go out.This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bagreadiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be
ready to warn you if thereis a problem.
2-67
AIR BAG OFF Light (Except Crew Cab)
When you turn the rightfront passenger’s air bagoff,
this light will comeon and stay on to remind you that
the air bag has been turned off. This light willgo off
when you turn the air bag back onagain. See “Securing
a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in
the Index for more on this, including important
safety information.
2-68
I A CAUTION:
If the right frontpassenger’s air bag is turned
off, an adult or child
a
who is no longer an infant
sitting in the right front
passenger’s position
won’t have the extra protectionof an airbag. In
a crash, the air bag
wouldn’t be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Make
sure the air bag
is turned on unless you are using
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
seat position.
/I\ CAUTION:
Charging System Indicator Light
I
If the air bag readiness light ever comeswhen
on
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with
the air bag system.
The right frontpassenger’s air bag couldinflate
even thoughthe switch isoff. If this ever
happens, don’t securea rearfacing child
restraint inyour vehicleuntil you have your
vehicle serviced.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition, before starting the
engine, as a check to show
you it is working.
After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays
on or comes on while you are driving, you may havea
problem with your charging system.
It could indicate a
problem with thegenerator drive belt, or some other
charging system problem. Have
it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it
helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and the air conditioner.
2-69
Voltmeter
When your engine is not
running, but the ignitionis
in RUN, this gage shows
your battery's state of
charge in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when
a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle andthe engine is left at an idle for an
extended period.This condition is normal since the
charging systemis not able toprovide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition shouldcorrect itself as higherengine speeds
allow the charging systemto create maximum power.
You can only drivefor a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the chargingsystem. Readings betweenthe
low and high warningzones indicate the normal
operating range.
2-70
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soonas possible.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have yourbrake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it
doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
I
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
on can lead
with the brake system warning light
to an accident.If the lightis still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight
will also come on when you set your parking brake.The
light will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays onafter your parking brakeis fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or,the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
2-71
Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light
ANTI LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
I
l
l This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
*\\I‘
100
%
,
0
260
If the light stayson, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system
warning light isn’ton, you still have brakes, but you
don’t haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with yourregular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light”earlier in this section.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicleis
working. Duringa majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (lOO°C) or less. If you are pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the260°F (125°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the260°F ( 125“C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling systemis working beyond its capacity.
The anti-lock brake system warninglight should come
on briefly when youturn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be
ready to warn you if there isa problem.
In “Problems on the Road,”this manual shows whatto
do. See “Engine Overheating”in the Index.
2-72
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) andis intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the lifeof the
vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. (In
Canada, OBD II is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.)
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on
to
indicate that thereis a problem and serviceis required.
Malfunctions often willbe indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This systemis also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you itis
working, when theignition is on and theengine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emissioncontrol system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has beendetected on yourvehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-73
If the LightIs Flashing
If the LightIs On Steady
The following may prevent moreserious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering thefollowing:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof
cargo being hauled as soon as
it is possible.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sureto fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light
off.
If the light stopsflashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light IsOn Steady” following.
If the lightcontinues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stup the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady,see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previoussteps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified servicecenter for service.
2-74
Did youjust drive througha deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when theelectrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turnthe light off.
Are you low onfuel?
As your engine starts to runout of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts
of
air are suckedinto the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detectthis. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicleinto gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system andcause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It willrequire at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper testequipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may havedeveloped.
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows
the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds persquare inch)
when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above
the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by
a dangerously low oil levelor some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible.
2-75
Up Shift Light (If Equipped)
I
!!
GL1U
i
ION:
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure islow. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire.You or otherscould be burned.
Check youroil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil
problems can becostly and is not coveredby
your warranty.
This light is used on
some models with
manual transmissions,
SHIFT
The SHIFT’ indicator light will helpyou get the bestfuel
economy. See “Shift Light”or “Shift Speeds” in this
section for more information.
2-76
..
.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light
This light goes on whenever
the DRL are on.
:::O
e..
When it beginsto get dark, the DRL indicator light is a
reminder to turn on your headlamps.
Check Gages Light
I
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
CHECK
GAGES
If the light comeson and stays on while you are driving,
it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be
a problem with your oilpressure, coolant temperature,
or some other problem. Check your various gagesto see
if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your
vehicle serviced rightaway.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage, when the
ignition is on, tells you
about how muchfuel you
have left in your tank.
Eb"
Here are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicatea problem w.ith the
fuel gage.
At the gas station, the fuel pumpshuts off before the
gage readsFULL (F).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half
full, but it actually tooka
little more or less than half the tank's capacity to
fill
the tank.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage willfirst indicate EMPTY (E) before you are
out of fuel, and you shouldget more fuel as soon
as possible.
The gage doesn't go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
If you have a diesel engine, see "Fuel Gage" in the
Diesel Engine Supplement.
2-78
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to readabout the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3- 12
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo Radio
Playing the Radio
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic ToneControl
3- 15
3- 16
3-20
3-21
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
CD Adapter Kit
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control
Playing a Compact Disc in theSingle Remote
Disc Player
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Heater Control System
the relativeair temperature independentlyof the function
knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward the red
area for warmer air.Move the knob counterclockwise
toward the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on thecontrol panel allows you to
choose the directionof air delivery. Thecontrol knob
can be placed in any position between two mode
settings
to blend the flowof air.
-0
/J VENT: This setting directs air through the
instrument panel outlets.
+0
+#
Fan Knob
The knob on the leftside of the heating systemcontrol
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has
four speed
positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, moveit toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
3-2
VENTEEAT: Use this setting to divide airflow
between thefloor outlets and instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs air through the
floor outlets.
w
DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater
outlets and toward the windshield.
DEFROST This setting directs air toward
the windshield.
Heater and Air Conditioning Control
System (If Equipped)
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperatureof the air flowing into the passenger
you to adjust
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow
the relative air temperature independently
of the function
knob setting. Move theknob clockwise toward the red
area for warmer air. Move the knob counterclockwise
toward the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows youto
choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob
can be placed in any position between two mode
settings
to blend the flowof air.
Fan Knob
The knob on the le.ftside of the heating system control
panel controls thefan speed. The knob has four speed
positions. To increase airflow, movethe knob toward
HI. To decrease airflow, move it towardLO. To turn the
fan off, move the knobto OFF. If you have the air
conditioner on, moving the fan knobto OFF also turns
off the A/C compressor.
In OFF, while driving, ram airflow will ventto the floor
outlets. The mode knob will not redirect ram airflow
to
other selected outlet positions. This is normal operation
for the OFF position.
e
0
/J VENT: This setting directs air through the
*.
?#
instrument panel outlets.
+’
VENT/HEAT Use this setting to divide airflow
between the floor outlets and instrument paneloutlets.
HEATER: This setting directs air through the
heater floor outlets.
w. DEFOG: This
+
’
setting directs air to the heater
outlets and toward the windshield.
DEFROST This setting directs air toward
the windshield.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
air inside escape.This reduces the time it takesfor your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the airconditioner to work its best.
The recirculation button, between the fan and
temperature knobs,allows the air inside your vehicle to
be recirculated.This setting helps to maximize yourair
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’sfuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest and
can be used to keep unwantedodors and/or dust from
entering the vehicle. When using the
air conditioner,
turn off recirculationafter the vehicle reachesa
comfortable interior temperature. When the right knob
on the control panel is between HEATER and
DEFROST, the recirculation feature will not function.
The A/C button, between the temperature and mode
knobs, allows the aircoming into your vehicle tobe
cooled. This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot
days. When you use A/C withthe recirculation button
pushed in, turn off recirculation as soonas the vehicle
reaches a comfortable interior temperature.
3-4
With the A/C on, move the temperature knob to MAX
for maximum cooling.This setting also puts the system
in the recirculation mode and helps
to maximize your
air conditioner’s performanceand your vehicle’sfuel
economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest. After
the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable temperature,
move the temperature knobclockwise to placethe air
conditioning system in the normal mode.
Heating
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER or
VENTMEAT setting withthe temperature knobin
the red area.
If you use the engine coolant heater beforestarting your
engine in cold weather,20°F (-8OC) or lower, your
heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat
the passenger compartmentin cold weather.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the
time it takesfor the engine to reach normal operating
temperature, and shortens the timeit takes the heater to
reach full output. For more information,see “Engine
Coolant Heater” in the Index.
,
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outsideair to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving.
With the side
windows closed,air will flow into the frontair inlet grrlles,
through the vehicle, and out theair exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or
the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the
recirculation button pushed in. For more information on
the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier
in this section.
Your vehicle has air outlets in the center andon the sides
of your instrument panel.You can move the outlets from
side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air, or
close the outlets altogether. When youclose an outlet, it
will increase the flow of air comingout of any outlets
that are open. These outlets do not completely shutoff
airflow when inthe closed position.
Ventilation Tips
0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will workfar better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving.
This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow and
moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path underthe front seats clear of
objects. This helpsair to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
0
The use of hood air deflectors may adversely
affect the performanceof the heating andair
conditioning system.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the
windshield and side windows clear. Use
DEFROST to
remove fog or ice fromthe windshield in extremely
humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the
temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control
toward HI.
Rear Window Defogger(If Equipped)
If you see lines runningacross the rear window, you
have a rear window defogger. The lines warmthe glass.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
next to the fan control knob.
The rear window defogger
will only workif the
ignition switch is turned
to RUN. For best results,
clear the window of as
much snow or ice as
possible first.
The defogger will shut itself
off after several minutes.
If you need additional warming time, press the button
again. You can turn the defogger off at any time
by
pressing the button.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape or decals
across the defogger grid onthe rear window.
I
~~
~~
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Audio Systems
Your [email protected] system has been designedto operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoymentout of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting the mostout of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Press SET. Within five seconds, press andhold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appearson
the display. Press andhold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on thedisplay.
Setting the Clockfor Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears onthe
display. Press andhold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HPUMIN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds.There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
I
3-7
AM-FM Stereo
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tunein radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrowto tune to the next higher
station andthe left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttonsto listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light upon the
display. Press the right arrow
to tune in the next higher
station and press the left arrow
to tune to the next lower
station. Press VOLUMEor both SEEK buttons to
stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system
on and off and
controls the volume.To increase volume andturn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition
off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knobto switch between AM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
3-8
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and holdone of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the stationyou set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to
three more stations may be preseton each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time.Just:
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
(If Equipped)
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down toincrease or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Speakers
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
BAL: Turn the control behind the upperknob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between thespeakers.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound betweenthe speakers.
3-9
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knobto tune inradio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and theleft arrow to tune to the next lower
station andstay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
21 stations (seven A M , seven FMl and seven FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the stationyou set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-10
In addition to the four stations already set, up to
three more stations may be preseton each band by
pressing two adjoining buttonsat the same time.Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttonsat the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of your preset stations. The system will scan through
and play each preset station storedon your pushbuttons
for a few seconds. Presseither SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the preset
stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever upor down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape player is built to work best withtapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well inthis player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL FADE, BASS and TREBjust as you do for
the radio.
REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette
tape. Press the SEEK right arrow tostop reversing
the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knobto switch tape sides.
EJECT Press this button to remove the tape or stop
the tape and play the radio. If you leave a cassette
tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may
become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you shouldclean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
the player,press and hold EJECTfor five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-11
-_
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped)
and wind noise asyou drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control
ring behind the upper
knob clockwiseto adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume,as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don't want to use SCV, turn the controlall the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensation ata faster rate of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.The knob is
capable of being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV: Your system has afeature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
3-12
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn itto
choose radio stations. Push the knob back
into its stored
position when you're not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tuneto the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears onthe display. SCAN allows youto
listen to stations for a few seconds.The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station
until you press the buttonagain. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six F M l and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desked station.
4. Press AUTO TONE toselect the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen
to a specific preset station. RSCAN will light up on the
display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on
a pushbutton is too weakfor the location you are in, the
radio display will show the channel number (Pl-P6) for
several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into
their stored positions when
you're not using them.
AUTO TONE:Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each timeyou press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK,POP,
COUNTRYNESTERN or JAZZ. To return to the
manual mode, press andrelease this button until the
AUTO TONE display goes blank.This will return the
tone adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to
release it from its
stored position. Turnthe control clockwise to adjust
be on the display whenevera tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
sound to the rightspeakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers.The middle position
balances the sound betweenthe speakers.
The player automatically sensesif the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjustsfor best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol willappear on
the display.
FADE: Press lightly onthis knob to releaseit from its
stored position. Turnthe control clockwise to adjustthe
sound to thefront speakers and counterclockwise for
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape player is built to work bestwith tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long oneach side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well inthis player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on butthe radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBcontrols just asyou do
for the radio. The tape symbol anda direction arrow will
3-14
PREV (1): Press the PREV buttonor the SEEK left
arrow to searchfor the previous selection.A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2):Press this button to switch fromone side of
the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press theNEXT button or theSEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection.A minimum
three-second blankgap is requiredfor the player to
stop at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink duringthe SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reversethe tape to
the beginningof the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the
last selected station while
reversing the tape.The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverseoperation.
00 (5):
Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch froma tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
EJECT Press this button to removethe tape. The
radio will now play. EJECTcan be used witheither the
ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading the
cassette. If you leave acassette tape in the player while
listening to the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs tobe cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soonas possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
the player,press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display --- to
show theindicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to usea CD adapter kit with yourcassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, the ignition mustbe on.
Turn your radio off. Press TAPE AUX and hold for
three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in
the display willflash for two seconds indicating the
feature is active. Insert the adapter cassette again.
It will power up theradio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-15
AM-FM Stereowith Compact Disc Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volumeat the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwiseto adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control allthe
way down. Each detenton the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at afaster rate of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will showyour selection.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knobto turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this buttonto recall the station frequency.
SCV Your system hasa feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road
3-16
TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn itto
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow totune to the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display.SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons
let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFM 1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return andthe tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press
RSCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen
to a specific stored station. P.SCAN will light up on the
display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on
a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are
in, the
radio display will show the channel number(P 1-P6) for
several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knobto release it from its
stored position. Turn theknob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on thisknob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each timeyou press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP,
COUNTRYNESTERN or JAZZ. To return to the
manual mode, press and releasethis button until the
AUTO TONE display goes blank.This will return the
tone adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
3-17
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightlyon this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise adjust
to
to
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise
adjust soundto the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears
on the
display, it could be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
FADE: Press lightly on this knobto release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise
to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(Please note that you can
also turn the system on when
you insert a compact discinto the player with the
ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the
slot, label side up. The
player will pullit in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol willalso appear on
the display. Anytimeyou are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be nextto the CD symbol.
3-18
You are driving on a very rough road. (Thedisc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
0
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search forthe previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, thedisc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the trackson the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again
to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection.
If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and holdREV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
REV button. This allows
high speed while you press the
you to listen and find out when the disc isat the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6):Press and hold this buttonto advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection playat
high speed while you pressthe FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the discis at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button tosee what track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long theCD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenthsof a second. The track
to
number will also appear when a new track begins
play. Press RECALL againto return to the time display.
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press theAM-FM button. To
return to the player, pressCD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the lettersCD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
at the point where
in the player and will resume playing
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this buttonto eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same aornew disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track
one. If a
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds,the player will pull theCD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition
is off,
press this buttonto load a CD. If you leave a compact
disc in the player while listeningto the radio, it mav
become warm.
AM-FM: While in theCD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio.The CD symbol
will still display but the wordCD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays inthe player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
3-19
Playing a CompactDisc in the Single Remote Disc
Player (If Equipped)
and player from damage. The
disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functionsare controlled by the
radio buttons exceptfor EJECT. When a discis in the
player, aCD symbol will appearon the display. When a
disc is playing, the lettersCD will appear nextto the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner.
The track number will
also be displayed.
If you have this option,you can play one compactdisc
(CD) at a time.
To load aCD into the player, hold the disc with the label
side up and insert itcarefully into the player
(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be
pulled into the player.If the radio is off and the ignition
is on when a CDis inserted, the radio will turnon and
begin playing theCD. It is possible to load and unload
CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press theEJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc.
To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the
disc from the player.
A disc that has been ejected butis still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects thedisc
If the disc comes backout and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
There’s too much moisturein the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
0
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealershipif any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this buttonto go back to the start
of the current trackif more than eight seconds have
played. Press PREV againto go to the previous track
on thedisc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find thecorrect passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed to help youfind the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playinga CD to go
back to thestart of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on thediscs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, theprevious or next track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and returnto normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again withinfive
seconds to see how long the track has beenplaying.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALLa third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player andthe
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between thetape and compact disc.
EJECE Press this button on the remote
player to eject a
compact disc. If you leave a compact disc in the player
while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally andthe
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will notoperate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCKis activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock theradio with the secret code
before it will operate.
3-21
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow, explain howto enter your
secret code toactivate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through
all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than15 seconds toelapse
between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto
time and you must startthe procedure over atStep 4.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will show REPto let you know that you
need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to letyou know that your radio is secure.The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignitionis turned off.
1. Write down any threeor four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it ina safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignitionto ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last twodigits agree
with your code.
1. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
3-22
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. LOC appears when theignition is on.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digitsagree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5 . Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating theradio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to waitan hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more man
15 seconds between steps:
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secureduntil the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and
later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Understanding Radio Reception
2. Turn the radio off.
FM Stereo
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one ortwo digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
3-23
Tips AboutYour Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise
is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Soundthat seems normalcan be loud
by
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
adjusting the volume control on your radioto a safe
sound level before your hearingadapts to it.
To help avoid hearingloss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
3-24
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
important todo it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation
of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco radio or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of
sound equipment that has
been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment,check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobileradio and telephoneunits.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality,ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be storedin their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used yourtape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears
on the display, yourcassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as
soon aspossible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality,clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It
is normal for thecassette to eject while cleaning because
your unit isequipped with a cut tape feature. To
temporarily override this feature for vehicles with
Automatic Tone Control (for one insertion), turn on the
ignition then turn the radiooff and press and hold TAPE
AUX until the tape symbol flashes on the display, then
insert the cassette again. For vehicles without Automatic
Tone Control, press both SEEK arrows within five
seconds of inserting the cassette with the ignition and
radio off. Insert the cassette at least three times to ensure
thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette
is available through your GM dealership.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head.This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing
type cleaner.
3-25
The cassette tape player is able to detect a broken tape.
Some cleaning cassettes may appear asa broken tape. If
the cleaning cassette is ejected immediately fromthe
tape player, follow these steps:
1 . Turn the radio off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Press and hold the TAPE-AUX buttonuntil the tape
symbol flashes.
4. Insert the cleaning cassette and the radio willturn on
in cassette mode.
5 . Eject the tape after the tape player has been cleaned.
When the cleaningcassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is active again.
After you cleanthe player, press and hold EJECT
for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear andthe sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the
cassette
tape is in good conditionbefore you have your tape
player serviced.
3-26
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases
or other protectivecases and away fromdirect sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from thecenter to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal
surface when handling
discs. Pick up discsby grasping the outeredges or the
edge of the hole andthe outer edge.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged.If the mast should ever become
slightly bent,you can straighten itout by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every oncein a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl.
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other usefultips on driving.
4-2
4- 3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-1 1
4- 12
4-13
4- 14
4-27
4-29
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving Guidelines
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-32
4-32
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-37
4-4 1
4-45
4-45
4-45
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Camper Wiring Harness
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Towing a Trailer
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
I”
1
A
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roadsor freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are aboutthe most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’sthe best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle infront of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and drivingis
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor
to
the highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and thendrive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much”if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general informationon the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends uponfour things:
Drunken Driving
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
MuscularCoordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records showthat almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under2 1, it’s
against the lawin every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinkingthree 4-ounce (1 20 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, ginor vodka.
4-3
~
Since alcohol is carriedin body water, this means thata
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at aBAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing numberof U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’veseen, it
depends on how much alcohol isin the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be closeto 0. I2 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lowerBAC level.
There is a gender difference, too.
Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well belowa BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research showsthat the drivingskills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and thatthe effects are worse at night, All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance
of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have aBAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with BAC
a
level of
0.06 percent has doubledhis or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAClevel of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver havinga collision is 12 timesgreater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times
greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency,a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with evena moderate BAC might not beable
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know.Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that whenanyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled
is higher than if the person had not beendrinking.
‘A
I
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can havea serious or even
fatal collision if youdrive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homeain
cab; or if
you’re with a group, designatea driver who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where thetires meet the road.
Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver
and as long as twoor three secondsor more with
another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination
and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could bea lot of distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement
or
gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry,icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount
of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’redriving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means
you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That
means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.If you do, the
pedal may get harder to pushdown. If your engine
stops, you will still have some powerbrake assist. But
you will use it when youbrake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will checkitself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
ANTI LOCK
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light”
in the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer
is
programmed to make the mostof available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animaljumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happenswith ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down. If one
of the wheels is aboutto stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at the
rear wheels.
4-8
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room upahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock workfor you. You may feel the brakes
vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal.
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your anti-lock brakes
work at all times -- whether you are in two-wheel drive
or four-wheel drive.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the verybest braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is notfunctioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Variable Effort Steering
This system varies the amountof steering effort
proportionate to your vehicle speed.Steering is easier
at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease.As
your vehicle speed increases, the steering effort also
increases. At highway speeds, the amount of steering
effort is increased for vehicle control and stability.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s importantto take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen oncurves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angleat
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp,curve.Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective
than braking. Forexample, you come overa hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere,or a child darts out from between
What shouldyou do if this ever happens? Ease up on the parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
avoid these problemsby braking -- if you can stop
to go, and slow down.
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the timefor evasive action -- steering around
Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should
the problem.
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less
Your vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like
favorable conditions you’ll want togo slower.
in
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is betterto
If you need to reduce your speed asyou approach a
remove as much speedas you can from a possible
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
wheels are straight ahead.
right dependingon the spaceavailable.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
I OFF-
ROAD RECOVERY
/
I
I
7
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergencysituations are always
possible is agood reason topractice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety
belts properly.
SLOWDOWN
edge of paved surface
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle aboutto pass another ona
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passinganother vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupiesthe same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an errorin
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the
worst of all trafficaccidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tipsfor passing:
0
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait fora better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken
4-12
center line usually indicates it’sall right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never crossa solid
line on your sideof the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.
0
to pass
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing,
following too closely reduces your area
of vision,
especially if you’re followinga larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move
so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will havea
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. Andif
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop backagain.and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that if
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to befarther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get aheadof you. Perhaps you
can ease a littleto the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enoughfriction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t giveup. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems.In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-13
.
..
If your vehicle startsto slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle maystraighten out. Always be readyfor a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice,
gravel or other materialis on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down andadjust your drivingto these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stoppingdistance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Driving Guidelines
Off-Road Driving withYour
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guideis forvehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes”in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheeldrive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re
on a level,
solid surface.
While driving ona surface with reducedtraction, try
your best to avoid suddensteering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause thetires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water,ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Off-road dnving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatestof these is the
terrain itself.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid onlythe braking skid.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.
4-14
“Off-roading” means you’veleft the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces canbe slippery, rough, uphillor downhill. In
short, you’ve gone right back
to nature.
1
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the
fluid levels up where they shouldbe? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving?
If you don’t know, you shouldcheck with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important thingsto remember about
how to load your vehicle.
The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t tossthings around.
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks canbe thrown forward
during a suddenstop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the topof the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can
be struck by flying objects. Securethe
cargo properly.
Heavy loads on theroof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more
likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on roof.
the
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,”“Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying
recreation. However, italso raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting theenvironment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
0
Always use established trails, roads andareas that
have been specially setaside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It’s also a good idea to travelwith at least one other
vehicle. If something happensto one of them, the other
can help quickly.
0
Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down treesor unnecessary driving through
streams or over softground).
Does your vehicle havea winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. Ina remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
0
Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
0
Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
0
Never park your vehicle over drygrass or other
combustible materials that could catch
fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-16
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before yougo into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require somenew and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listenfor
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Scanning the Terrain
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some thingsto
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
0
Off-road driving can take you over manydifferent kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and
its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
you approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
0
you have less time to react.
0
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
[email protected] Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending uponthe kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
Surjiuce Obstucles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you
if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
canthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
-1
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick
changes
in easily direction
throw
you
out of position. This could cause you
to lose
control and crash.So, whether you’re drivingon
or off the road,you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
0
Is the path ahead clear?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
0
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s
more discussion of these subjects later.)
0
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
L
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, youcan’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will beon an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requiresa different kindof
alertness from drivingon paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limitsor signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving canbe very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainlytrue for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” inthe Index.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t
do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
1
Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall.
If you drive
down them,you can’t control your speed.If you
drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be
seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill,you need to decide if it’s one of
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
those hills that’sjust too steepto climb, descend or cross.
need to take some special steps.
Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for 0
Use a low gear and get a firmgrip on the
example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a
steering wheel.
small change in elevation whereyou can easily see all the
a large hill, the incline may get steeper as0 Get a smooth start up the hill and tryto maintain
way to the top. On
you nearthe top, butyou may not see this because the crest of your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheelsto start spinning
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
sliding.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach a or
hill.
0
0
0
0
0
Is there a constantincline, or does the hillget sharply
steeper in places?
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down the hillso you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructionson the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
What’s beyond the hill?Is there a cliff,an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the
hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
0
Try to drive straight up the hillif at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want
to find
another route.
A CAUTION:
lhrning or driving across steep hills can
be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
You could be
sideways, and possibly roll over.
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
0
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
@
What shouldI do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, andI can’t makeit up the hill?
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic ontrails or hills.
A:
If this happens, thereare some things you should
do, and thereare some things you must not do.
0
Sound the horn as you approach the top
of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.
0
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visibleto oncoming traffic.
First, here’s what youshould do:
J
Driving to the top (crest)
of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You
As you near
could be seriously injured or killed.
the top of a hill,slow down and stay alert.
4-20
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
0
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down thehill i n REVERSE (R).
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the
parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmissionto
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL(N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) andrestart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE(R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE(R).
0
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver asyou back down. It’s best that you
back down thehill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the leftor right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are
about to stall, when going upa hill.
0
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine
and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
Your vehicle will rollbackwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
0
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
@
Suppose, after stalling,
I try to backdown the hill
and decide I just can’t doit. What shouldI do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in FIRST(1))
and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get
of
some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear
the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.
Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N)
when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in I negel
(N) can
Shifting the transfer case toNEUTR
cause yourvehicle to roll evenif the transmission
is in PARK (P)(or, if you have the manual
transmission, even if you’re in gear). Thisis
because the NEUTRAL (N) position on the
transfer case overrides the transmission.
If you
are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking
brake and shift the transmissionPARK
to
(P)
(or, put your manual transmission in FIRST
(1)).
But do not shift the transfer
case to the
NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfercase
in the2 Wheel, 4 High or 4 Low position.
I
4-21
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takesyou downhill, you
consider a number of things:
11 want
to
I
Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
a serious accident.
cause loss of control and
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
How steep is the downhill? WillI be able to maintain
vehicle control?
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bankor even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to
keep your vehicle headedstraight down, and usea low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control atall times.
4-22
a CAUTIO, .:
&:
Are there some thingsI should not do when
driving downa hill?
A:
Yes! These are important becauseif you ignore them
you could lose control and have a serious accident.
0
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across theincline of the hill. A hill that’s nottoo
steep to drive down may be too steepto drive across.
You could roll over ifyou don’t drive straight down.
0
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will haveto do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A:
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift to PARK (P) (or toNEUTRAL (N) with the manual
transmission) and, while still braking, restartthe engine.
Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
e If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
Driving Acrossan Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try todrive across the incl.ine. Hereare some
things to consider:
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base(the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (thedistance between
the left and right wheels) may not
prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hitsomething
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle cantilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline doesn’t meanyou have to
drive it. The last vehicle to
try it might have rolled over.
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over.You could be
If you have any doubt
seriously injured or killed.
about the steepnessof the incline, don’t drive
across it. Find another route instead.
Qt
What if I’m driving across anincline that’s not
too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and startto
slide downhill. What shouldI do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill.This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent theside slipping. However,a
much better wayto prevent this is to getout and
“walk the course”so you know what the surfaceis
like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, evenif the door thereis harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stayout of the path
the vehicle will takeif it does roll over.
Getting out on the downhill
(low) side of a vehicle
stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side
of the
vehicle and staywell clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get goodtraction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer
braking distances.
~
It’s best to use a low gear whenyou’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense achange in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (ason beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reducethe air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy tolose control. On wet
ice, forexample, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
Driving on frozen lakes, pondsor rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the Your
ice.
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flashflooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is beforeyou drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water thatdeep can damage youraxle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’ttoo deep, then drive throughit slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occurif you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be ableto start your
engine. When yougo through water, remember that when
your brakes get wet, it maytake you longer to stop.
ki
CAU
IN:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
If it’s
and you and your passengers could drown.
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and
you could lose
over. Don’t drive
traction and roll the vehicle
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water”in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
4-26
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can bea fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Checkthe body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle willrequire more frequent servicedue to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor
additional information.
Driving at Night
.......
.^
....
.........................
."
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don't drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can't see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Your
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you're tired, pull off the road ainsafe place
and rest.
I
..........................
......................
0
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likelyto be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-27
. . . .
I
.
.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twiceas much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytimecan also affect your night
vision. For example,if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But
if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglassesat night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they
also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blindedby approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyesto readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare(as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,
or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow downa little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
4-28
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirton the glass. Even the insideof the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when youare in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; thatway, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light-- and
aren’t even awareof it.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much treadleft, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wiseto go slower andbe
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape,a heavy rain
can make it harderto see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
4
4
I -
It’s wiseto keep your wiping equipmentin good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank
filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts
when they showsigns of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause
4-29
I A CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakeswork normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddlesor even
going through somecar washes cancause problems, too.
The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoidpuddles.
But if you can't, try to slowdown before you hitthem.
4-30
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous.So much water can build up
on the water.
under your tires that they can actually ride
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact withthe road.
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
of your vehicle.If you
lower than the underbody
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butit can if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happenif a lot of water is standing on
the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple”
the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The
best advice is to slow down whenit is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-31
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your
trip into an
unknown part of the cityjust as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green lightas a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it.
When a light turns green, and
just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not
cleared the intersectionor may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of trafficon them. You’ll wantto watch out for
what the otherdrivers are doing and pay attentionto
traffic signals.
4-32
Freeway Driving
speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat
the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, thereis usually a ramp that leads
to the
freeway. If you have aclear view of the freewayas you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to
check traffic. Tryto determine whereyou expect to
blend with the flow. Try
to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switchon your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder
as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate
if it's slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your
shoulder to make sure there
isn't another vehicle in your
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, "blind" spot.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
of all roads. But they have their
own special rules.
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep
slightly slowerat night.
up with traffic andkeep to the right. Drive at the same
4-33
When you want to leave the freeway, moveto the proper
lane well in advance.If you miss yourexit, donot,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon
to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some thingsyou can check beforea trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid:Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds,you may tendto think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Lamps: Are they all working? Arethe lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitallyimportant to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Isthe tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such asafter a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles thatfirst part
of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor along trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs
service, have it done beforestarting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to helpif you need it.
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your tripa short
time to avoid a major stormsystem?
a Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum
of the tires on the road,
the rush of the wind against
the drone of the engine, and
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road less
in
than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that itcan happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
e Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides, Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road
into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as
an emergency.
4-35
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Indexfor information about
driving off-road.)
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
0
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let yourengine do some of the
7Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work
of slowing down. They could get
so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking
or even none going down
a hill. You could crash.Always have your engine
running and yourvehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
0
0
If you don’t shift down,your brakescould get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking even
or
none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shiftdown to let
your engine assistyour brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
0
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hillsor mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across thecenter of the road. Driveat speeds that let
you stay in your ownlane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper,a small brushor broom, a supply
of windshield washerfluid, a rag, some winterouter
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if youwill be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in yourvehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your
tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between yourtires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need tobe
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-37
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently.Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
..............
.............
I
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Verycold
snow or ice can beslick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins tofall.
Try to avoid driving on wetice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
. ,
..
4-38
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you makea hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have ananti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would dry
on
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” inthe Index.
M o w greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hita spot that’s covered withice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas wherethe sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it.Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
a Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some
things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under yourclothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.
4-39
-
A
-
CAJTldN:
Snow can trap exhaustgases under yourvehicle.
CO (carbon monoxide) gas
This can cause deadly
to get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it,so you might not
know it is in yourvehicle. Clear awaysnow from
around the baseof your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaustpipe. And check
around again from time to time
be to
sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
of the
Open a window just a little on the side
vehicle that’s away from thewind. This will help
keep CO out.
4-40
Run your engineonly as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
it
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a
well-charged battery (or batteries) to restartthe vehicle,
and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps.
Let the heater runfor awhile.
to run it ata
If you have a diesel engine, you may have
higher speedto get enough heat.Then, shut the engine
off and close the window almost all the way
to preserve
the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only
when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But
do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuelas long as you
can. To help keep warm, you can get outof the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or
so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
I-
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
GAWR FRT
Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
RIM
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
-!=2
-
I
The Certificationrnire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document
in the cab.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
/;1 CAUTION:
In the case of a den stop or collision, things
carried in the bed of your truck could shift
forward and come into the passenger area,
injuring you and others. If you put things in the
sure they are
bed of your truck, you should make
properly secured.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the rightway.
The Certificationmire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
4-41
I
A CAUTION:
A CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If’you do, parts on your
vehicle can
break, orit can change theway your vehicle
handles. These couldcause you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten thelife of
your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
0 Put thingsin the cargo areaof your vehicle.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever
you can.
0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail
because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle-- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if
there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-42
There’s also important loading informationfor off-road
driving in this manual.See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if
your vehicle can carrya slide-in camper, how muchof a
load your vehicle can carry, and howto correctly spread
out your load. Also, it will help you match
the right
slide-in camper to your vehicle.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus
everything else added to the camper after it left
the factory,
0
everything in the camper and
all the people inside.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But, you can
figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
Use the rearedge of the load floor for measurement
purposes. The recommended location for the cargo
center of gravity is at point C forthe CWR. It is the
point where the mass ofa body is concentrated and,
if suspended at that point, would balancethe front
and rear.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Informationlabel in
glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the
following illustration.
4-43
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper
match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
r
‘J
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, driveto a
weigh station and weigh the
front and rear wheels
separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles.
The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more
than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads
should not be more thanthe GVWR.
Open your driver’s door and look at the
CertificationRire label to find out your GAWR
and GVWR.
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take
out some things untilall the weight falls below the
ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any
loose items when you load your vehicle or camper.
The camper’s centerof gravity should fall within the
center of gravity zonefor your vehicle’s cargo load.
When you install and load your slide-in camper, check
the manufacturer’s instructions.
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that
you add to your vehicle. Then,subtract this extra weight
from the CWR. Thisextra weight may shorten the
center of gravity zone of your vehicle.
Your dealer can
help you with this.
If you want more informationon curb weights, cargo
weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the
correct center of
gravity zonefor your vehicle, your dealer can help you.
Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information,
Truck-Camper Loading.”
A. Camper Center of Gravity
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the
CWR, the centerof gravity zonefor your vehicle may
be larger.
4-44
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from theCWR for
your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached,
so that you won’t go overthe GVWR or GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, andif you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see‘Trailer Towing” in the Index.
Zone Office.) Owners should be aware that, as
manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis
cab and a pickup with the box removed which may
affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapt
a pickup to permit its safeuse with a specialized body
should beinstalled by a body builder in accordance with
the information available from the Zone Office.
Towing a Trailer
Camper Wiring Harness
(If Equipped)
A five-wire harnessis stored in the front stake pocketon
the driver’s sideof the bed. The harness has no connector
and should be wiredby a qualified electrical technician.It
must be routed out of your vehicle and securely attached
so that it won’t be pulled or rubbed while you’re using
it. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the
harness together and tieit neatly so it won’t be damaged.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners
may consider having the pickup box removed anda
commercial or recreational body installed. Before you
do so, first contact the GM Zone Office for your area for
information on such conversions specific to this vehicle.
(See the “Warranty and OwnerAssistance” booklet for
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well or evenat all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section.
Ask your GM dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
4-45
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
by
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
GM dealer
the advice in this part, and see your
for important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Every vehicleis ready for some trailer towing.If yours
was built with traileringoptions, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than
just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability andfuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reasonfor this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-46
If you do, hereare some important points:
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal,not only where you live but
also where you’ll bedriving. A good sourcefor this
information can bestate or provincial police.
0
will
Consider usinga sway control if your trailer
weigh less than the capacity stampedon your step
bumper. You should always use a sway control if
your trailer will weigh more than the capacity
stamped on yourstep bumper. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
0
500 miles
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
(800 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts couldbe damaged.
0
Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 k m h ) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear
in at the
heavier loads.
a If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow
in OVERDRIVE (@).You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loadsand/or hilly conditions). If
you have a manual transmission and you are towing
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you needto,
a lower gear).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh,based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle mustbe subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
Above the 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) trailer rating, the engine
oil cooler is required on C/K-1500 and C/K-2500
models with gas engines. Refer to the Trailering Guide
for oil cooler recommendations.
Above the 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) trailer rating, heavy-duty
- 1500 models,
or gas shock absorbers are required Con
and heavy-duty shock absorbers or the off-road chassis
package are required onK- 1500 models.
It depends on how you plan to use yourrig. For example,
speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend
on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-47
C-1500 (2WD)
K-1500 (4WD)
Engine (Trans.)AxleRatio
(Auto.)
4.3L
3 .OS
4.3L (Manual)
5.0L (Auto.)
5.0L (Manual)
5.7L
6.5L Diesel
4-48
3.42
3.73
3.08
3.42
3.73
3.OS
3.42
3.08
3.42
3.08
3.42
3.73
3.08
3.42
Max. Trailer Wt.
4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
2,000 lbs. (908 kg)
2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg)
4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
2,000 lbs. (908 kg)
3,000 lbs. ( 1 362 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio
4.3L (Auto.)
3.73
4.3L (Manual)
3.73
5.0L (Auto.)
3.42
3.73
5.0L (Manual)
3.42
3.73
5.7L
3.42
3.73
6.5L Diesel
3.42
3.73
Max. TrailerWt.
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
C-2500 (2WD)
Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.
5.0L (Auto.)
3.42
5,500 lbs. ( 2 497
kg)
3.73
6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
5 .OL (Manual)
3.42
3,000lbs. (1 362kg)
4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg)
3.73
5.7L
3.42
6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
kg)
3.73
7,000 lbs. (3 178
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
4.10
3.42
Diesel
6.5L
6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg)
(Auto.)
3.73
4.10
8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg)
7.4L
(Auto.)
3.73
9,000 lbs.* (4 086 kg)
4.10
1I O
, OO lbs.**(4994kg)
*Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 9,000 lbs. (4 086kg).
**Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
K-2500 (4WD)
Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.
5.7L
3.73
6,000 lbs. ( 2 724 kg)
4.10
7,500 lbs.(3405
kg)
6.5L Diesel
3.42
6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg)
6,500 lbs. (2 951kg)
3.73
4.10
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
8,500 lbs.* (3 859 kg)
3.73
(Auto.)
7.4L
4.10
10,500 lbs.**(4 767 kg)
*Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg).
**Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
4-49
--
C-3500 (2WD)
Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer
Wt.
5.7L
4.10
7,500 lbs. ( 3 405 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 086 kg)
4.56
6.5L Diesel
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
4.10
7.4L
4.10
10,500
lbs.*
(4
767 kg)
4.56
12,500
lbs.* (5 675
kg)
*Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limitedto 10,000 Ibs. (4 540 kg).
4-50
K-3500 (4WD)
Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer
Wt.
5.7L
4.10
7,000 lbs. (3
kg)178
6.5L Diesel
4.10
7,500
405
lbs.
(3
4.56
12,000lbs.* (5 448 kg)
4.10
7.4L
kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg)
*Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
C-3500 Crew Cab (2WD)
K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD)
Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer
Wt.
7,000 lbs. (3
kg)178
4.10
5.7L
4.56
8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg)
6.5L Diesel
4.10
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
7.4L
4.10
10,500lbs.* (4 767 kg)
4.5612,500
lbs.* ( 5 675 kg)
*Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer
Wt.
5.7L
4.10
6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg)
8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
4.56
4.10
7,500 lbs. (3 405kg)
6.5L Diesel
7.4L
4.10
10,000 lbs.* (4 540 kg)
4.56
12,000 Ibs.* (5 448 kg)
*Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4540 kg).
4-51
C-3500 HD Chassis Cab
Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.
6.5L Diesel
4.63
9,000 lbs.(4 086 kg)
5.13
10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg)
( 5 448kg)
7.4L
4.6312,000lbs.*
5.13
12,000lbs.* ( 5 448kg)
*Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or
advice, or you can write usat the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load(A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affectsthe total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weightof the vehicle, any cargoyou may carry
in it, and the people who will be riding
in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the
Index for more information about your vehicle‘s
maximum load capacity.
4-52
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tiresare inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edgeof the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading”in the Index. Then be sureyou don’t
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe
weight of the trailer tongue.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carryinghitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percentof
the total loaded trailer weight(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh thetrailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have thecorrect hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks goingby and rough roads are a
few reasons whyyou’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
0
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sureyou have
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
0
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step
bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway controlof the
proper size. This equipment is very important for
proper vehicle loading and good handling when
you’re driving.
4-53
Safety Chains
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at the
port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.If you do, it
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
of the trailer so that the tongue willnot drop to the road
if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions
Driving with a Trailer
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount
of experience.
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel
of
chains and do not attach themto the bumper. Always
handling
and
braking
with
the
added
weight
of
the
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
driving is now a good deal longer andnot nearly as
Trailer Brakes
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg)
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
loaded, then it needs its own brakes
-- and they must be
(and attachments), safetychains, electrical connector,
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has
the trailer brakesso you’ll be able to install, adjust and
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
maintain them properly.
then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure
the
brakes
are
working.
This
lets
you
check
your
Your trailer brake system cantap into the vehicle’s
electrical connection at the same time.
hydraulic brake systemonly if:
During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the
The trailer parts can withstand 3,OOO psi (20 650 Wa)
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
of pressure.
are still working.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0.02
cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
4-54
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passingdistance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good deal
longer, you’ll need togo much farther beyond the
passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Tt-----
-
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning witha trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel willflash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps willalso flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrowson your instrument
on the trailer
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you
are seeing your signal when theyare not. It’s important
to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer bulbsare
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed andshift to a lower gearbefore you start
down a longor steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade,shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
4-56
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow
in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
You may want to
shift the transmissionto THIRD (3) or, if necessary,a
lower gear selection ifthe transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
(a).
If you have a manual transmission and you
are towing a
FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just drive in
trailer, it’s better not to use
to, a lower gear).
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need
When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
you turn
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If
your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle
may show signs
similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably
on level ground)
with the automatic transmission inPARK (P) (or the
manual transmission outof gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off.
If you do get the overheat warning,see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People canbe injured, and both
your vehicle andthe trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rigon a hill, here's
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don't shift into
PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into
gear for amanual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until thechocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission, or REVERSE (R)for a
manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6 . Release the regular brakes.
c
It canbe dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, thevehicle
can move suddenly. You or otherscould be
injured. To be sure yourvehicle won't move, even
when you're on fairlylevel ground, use the steps
that follow.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle will be free
to roll, even if your shift leveris in PARK (P).So,
be sure the transfer case
is in a drive gear not
in NEUTRAL (N).
--
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parkine on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedulefor more
on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid(don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Eachof these is coveredin this
manual, andthe Index will help youfind them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start yourtrip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
and bolts
are tight.
4-58
Trailer Wiring Harness
A seven-wire harness is stored under the rear end
of
your vehicle, betweenthe frame rails. An electrical
connector willneed to be installed at the trailer end of
the harness,by a qualified electrical technician. For
additional trailer wiring and towing informationplease
consult your GM dealer. Securely attachthe harness to
the trailer, then tapeor strap it to your vehicle’sframe
rail. Be sure you leave it loose enoughso the wiring
won’t bind or break when turning with the trailer, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground.Store the
harness inits original position. Wrap the harness
together and tieit neatly so it won’t be damaged.If you
tow a trailer, your Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) may not be properly visible from behind.
You
should select a trailer with a CHMSL on it or,if one is
not available, have one installed. See your GM dealer
about how to connect your vehicle’s wiring
to a
trailer CHMSL.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winchon your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
I NOTICE:
Using a power winch with the transmissionin
gear may damage the transmission. When
operating a powerwinch, always leavethe
transmission in NEUTRAL(N).
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake,or block
the wheels to keep your vehiclefrom rolling.
Power Take-Off (PTO) (Manual Tkansmission)
NOTICE:
Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s or
installer’s instructions.
I NOTICE:
Using a PTO while operating inone place before
the vehicle has reached normal operating
temperature can damage the transfer case
or
transmission. If you willbe using the PTO while
operating in oneplace, drive and warm up the
vehicle before using thePTO.
To engage a PTO:
1. Hold the clutch pedal down.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
4. Engage the PTO.
If you have aPTO that will exceed 35 hp installed
on yourvehicle, it could damage the transfer
case
or transmission. When havinga PTO installed
on your vehicle, make sure thatit will not exceed
35 hp.
4-59
3. Engage the PTO.
NOTICE:
Using a PTO for more than four hours without
driving your vehicle can damage the transfer case
or transmission. If using
a PTO for more than
four hours without driving your vehicle, drive
to allow the transfer case
your vehicle for a while
and transmissionto cool.
4. Shift the transmission into the gear you want.
5. Release the clutch as you normally would. When you
release the clutch, the PTO willstart.
Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power
Take-Off (Manual Transmission)
1. Hold the clutch pedal down.
2. Set the parking brake.
If you are goingto drive the vehicle, shift the
transfer case intothe range you want (if you have
four-wheel drive). Then shift the transmission into
the' gear you want, apply the regular brakes and
release the parking brake.
5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you
normally would. When you release the
clutch, the
PTO will start.
To engage a PTO while the vehicle is moving:
1. Hold the clutch pedal down.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
4-60
3. Shift the transfercase into NEUTRAL (N).
4. If the vehicle will remain in the same place, shift
the
transmission into the highest gear.
5 . Engage the PTO.
If you are goingto drive the vehicle, shift the
transmission into the gear you want. Then shiftthe
transfer case into the range you want, applythe
regular brakes and releasethe parking brake.
6. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you
the clutch, the
normally would. When you release
PTO will start.
Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power
Take-Off (Automatic Transmission)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off.
3. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N).
4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
5. Engage the PTO.
If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the
transfer case into the range you want. Turnthe
ignition to START. Then apply theregular brakes
and release the parkingbrake.
Step-Bumper Pad
If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be equipped
with a rear step pad at the center of the bumper.
If you will be usingthe
bumper to towa trailer, you
must removethe center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball. You must
also remove both outer
cutouts to attach the trailer
safety chains.
6 . Shift the transmission to THIRD (3) to start the PTO.
7. Release the regular brakes to drive the vehicle.
Disengaging a Power Take-OFF
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Put the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Release the PTO
To remove the pad,lift the
edge of the pad from the
rear of the bumper and
swing it forward. When
the pad releases from the
bumper holes, lift the
pad off.
4. Restart the engine.
4-61
b
4-62
NOTES
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-1 1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)
5- 13
5-2 1
5-2 1
5-22
5-34
Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-11
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button at the top
of the steering column all
the way downto make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warningflashers work no matter what
position your key isin, and even if the keyisn't in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the
first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warnothers. They
also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won't flash if you're braking.
'
I
5-2
When the hazard warningflashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you canuse them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery (or batteries)has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables
to
start your vehicle. But please use the following steps
to
do it safely.
1 NOTICE:
~
Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your
vehicle warranty.
Don’t try to start yourvehicle by pushing or
pulling it. This coulddamage yourvehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. And
if you have
an automatic transmission, itwon’t start thatway.
Batteries can hurtyou. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burnyou.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things canhurt you.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
II NOTICE:
I
If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
- -
5-3
I
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but besure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be ableto
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage theelectrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake f m l y on both vehicles involvedin the
jump stat procedure. Put an automatic transmission in
PARK (P) or a manual transmissionNEUTRAL
in
(N).
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is notin NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turnoff all lamps
that aren’t neededas well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries.
In addition, it
could save yourradio!
5-4
I NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairswouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.
If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hood can start
up even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and
tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles couldbe damaged too.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use
a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough water.You
don’t need toadd water tothe Delco [email protected]
battery (orbatteries) installed in every newGM
vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, besure
the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low,add
water totake care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acidthat can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know.Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’tconnect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybeother parts too.
Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keep yourhands away from movingparts
once the engines are running.
5-5
5. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Don't let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) cable.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go
to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy unpainted metal
part of the vehicle with the dead battery.
8. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just asgood there,
but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
10. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
11. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have your GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle.See “Roadside Assistance”in
the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new, by adding suchthings as fog lamps, aero
skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions
may not becorrect.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-8
0
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has
the four-wheel-drive option.
0
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and transfercase, if you have one.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing servicearrives, let the tow operator
know that this manualcontains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to
see them.
I A CAUTION:
To help avoid injury to
you or others:
0
0
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safeor posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chainson each
side when towing a vehicle.
For pickups (except cab chassis models),
use T-hooks onfront of vehicle, J-hooks
on rear.
For cab chassismodels, use J-hooks on
front and rearof vehicle.
I [\
CAUTION:
t A vehicle can fall from a car carrier
if it isn’t
adequately secured. This can causecollision,
a
serious personal injury and
vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly securedwith chains or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath thetowed vehicle.
Don’t have your vehicle towedon the drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towedon the
drive wheels, be sureto follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
5-9
Front Towing
4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or
manual transmission in FIRST(1).
5 . Put the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake.
7. Maximum speed 55 mph (88 kmh), distance
unlimited.
If your vehicle is a two-wheel
drive or a four-wheel
drive with anelectric shift transfer case, use the
following directions:
1. Turn the ignition keyto the OFF position.
If your vehicle is four-wheel drive with a manual
transfer case, use the following directions:
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a clamping device designed for towing service.
(Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lockfor this.)
5-10
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Clamp the steering wheelin a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing service. (Do not use the vehicle’s steering
column lockfor this.)
4. Put an automatic transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
5. Put the transfer casein 2HIGH (2HI).
6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the
parking brake.
7. Maximum speed 35 mph (55 km/h), maximum
distance 50 miles (80 km).
Rear Towing
NOTICE:
Towing pickup models from the rearwhile loaded
with heavycargo may cause the frame side rails
to flex sufficiently to allow the pickup box to
contact the cab and
could cause damage to the
cab and/orbox.
Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel.
If your vehicle hasa diesel engine, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
I NOTICE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a manualor
electric shift transfer case, a towing dollymust be
used under the frontwheels or vehicldpowertrain
damage w
l
l
ioccur.
5-11
If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
tin
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch You
fire. or
others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if
it overheats, andget out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
I NOTICE:
I I A CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated
engine canburn you
badly, even if youjust open thehood. Stay away
from theengine if you see or hear steamcoming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from thevehicle until itcools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou
open thehood.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see
or hear no
steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when
you:
0
0
0
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan
speed and open the windowas necessary.
3. If you’re in a trafficjam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)
for automatic transmissions.
If you no longer havethe overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’tcome back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam,push the accelerator until
the engine speed isabout twice as fastas normal idle
speed. Bring theengine speed back to normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now seeif the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning, turn oflthe
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan(s)
I
A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hood can start
up even
when the engine isnot running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and
tools away from
any underhood electricfan.
If the coolant inside thecoolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
The coolant level should beat or above the COLD mark.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
I
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire,and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before
you drive thevehicle.
I NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
5-14
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See
if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by
pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your
vehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank Gasoline Engines
--
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of
clean water (preferably distilled) and [email protected]
(silicate-free) antifreezeat the coolant recovery tank. (See
“Engine Coolant’’in the Index for more information.)
With plain wateror the wrongmix, your engine
could get too hot but
you wouldn’t get the
overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire
and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50
mix of clean water and [email protected]
I NOTICE:
r
~~
I
Adding only plain water to yourcooling system
can be dangerous. Plainwater, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can
boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In cold weather, water canfreeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
5-15
I
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is or
at
above the COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but besure the cooling systemis
cool before you do it.
5-16
I
A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a cooling
hot
system can blow out and burnyou badly. They
if you turn the radiator
are under pressure, and
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the capwhen the
cooling system, includingthe radiator pressure
cap, ishot. Wait for thecooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to
turn the pressurecap.
--
--
5-17
How to Add Coolant tothe Radiator
2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressurecap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it
first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
. .
3. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
' I
i
f:
I
I
I
'
1
I
6. Start the engine andlet itrun until you can feel the
upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch outfor the
engine fan(s).
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck maybe lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] mixture
through the filler neck until the
level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-20
8. Then replace the pressurecap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Be sure the
arrows on the pressurecap line up like this.
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a clutchedengine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, thefan spi.nsfaster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutchis
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages.So you may
hear an increase infan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down whenadditional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’redriving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
to leak out slowly.
out of a tire, it’s much more likely
But if you shouldever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and whatto do:
You may also hear thisfan noise when you start the engine.
It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the
accelerator pedal andgrip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently braketo
a stop well out of thetraffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In anyrear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under controlby
steering the way you want the vehicleto go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the nextpart shows howto use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goesflat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
I A CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause
an injury. Thevehicle
roll overyou or other
can slip off the jack and
people. You and theycould be badly injured.
Find alevel place to change your tire.To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake
firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift
lever inPARK (P)or shift a manual
transmission toFIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle,
be sure the transfer caseis in a drive
gear not inNEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn off the engine.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can putblocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from theone being changed.
of the
That would be the tire on the other side
vehicle, at the opposite
end.
--
5-22
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing theSpare Tire and Tools
Extended Cab Models
2 and 4-Door Models
The equipment you'll needis behind the passenger's seat.
Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove the jack
cover, if there is one. Remove the jacking equipment.
If you have achassis cab, refer to the information from
the body supplierhstaller for the locationof your
spare tire.
You'll use thejack handle and the ratchetto remove the
underbody-mounted spare tire.
5-23
I
Lower
Raise
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. One side of the ratchet has anUP marking. The other
side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the ratchet
of the jack handle (as
to the hook near the end
illustrated) with theDOWN marking facing you.
Insert the, other end through the hole in the
rear
bumper and into the hoistshaft.
H
2. Turn the ratchetto lower the spare tire.to the ground.
Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
/1
3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the endof the cableso it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening,
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Ratchet
C. Jack Handle
D. Hoist Shaft
5-24
E. Valve Stem, Pointed
Down
E SpareTire
G. Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
4. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.
.
'
. . .*, :-....
:*>:.,;,:
,.
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), the jack
handle extension (B), the jack handle (C),the wheel
wrench (D) and the ratchet (E).
Attach thejack handle (andjack handle extension, if
needed) to thejack.
If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you'll need
the jack handle extension also.
5-25
a
If your vehicle has wheel
nut caps, use the wheel
wrench and ratchet
to remove them. Turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise, with
DOWN facing you, to
remove the wheel nutcaps.
Then take off the hub cap.
With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you, rotate
the ratchet clockwise.That will lift thejack head a little.
If the wheel also has a trim ring, use the wheel wrench
to pry along theedge and removeit.
If the wheel hasa smooth center piece, place the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pryout.
5-26
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1
1. Use the ratchet and
wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts. Turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise, with
DOWN facing you, to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t removethe wheel
nuts yet.
3
Front
Position
Rear
Position
2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is
on the front of the vehicle, position thejack on the
frame behind theflat tire. If the flat tire is on the
rear, positionthe jack on the rear axle betweenthe
spring and the shock absorber.
AC
I
Getting undera vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badly injured or
killed. Never getunder
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
NOTICE:
Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly
positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow
the vehicle to fall off the jack.Be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the properlocation before
raising yourvehicle.
5-27
~
Front Position
Rear Position
3. With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle
by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrenchclockwise.
Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
5-28
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5 . Remove any rustor dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
I a CAUTION:
Rust or dirton thewheel, or on the parts to
which itis fastened, can make the
wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
you change a
wheel, remove any rustor dirt from the
places
where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
wireor
brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
6 . Replace the wheel nuts
with the roundedend
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand using
the wheel wrench until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
b,CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease on studsor nuts. If you
do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-29
-
Front Position
Rear Position
7. Lower the vehicleby rotating the ratchet and wheel
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-30
8. Tighten the nuts f d y in
a criss-cross sequence as
shown by rotating the
wheel wrench clockwise.
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could leadto anaccident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere assoon as you can andhave the
nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to the
proper torque.See “Capacities and
Specifications” inthe Index.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to
To avoid
brake pulsation and rotor damage.
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
to the proper
nuts in the proper sequence and
torque specification.
9. Put the wheel trim back on. For vehicles with plastic
wheel nut caps, tighten the caps until they
are finger
tight, then tighten them an additional one-half
TI
with the ratchetand wheel wrench.
Storing a Flator Spare Tire andTools
'A
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury.In a sudden stopor collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the properplace.
Store theflat tire where the spare tire was stored.
5-31
For an underbody spare tire carrier, stow the tire under
the rearof the vehicle in thespare tire carrier.To store
the tire:
I
Lower
Raise
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear
of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure that the retainer
is fully seated
across the undersideof the wheel.
3. Attach the ratchet, with theUP mark facing you,
of the jack handle. Insert the
near the hook at the end
other end, on anangle, through the hole in therear
bumper andinto the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside
of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchetuntil there are
two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tire hoist
cannot be over-tightened.
tire to be sure it is stored
5 . Grasp and push against the
securely and does not move.
H
r-
e>&
E
F-
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Ratchet
C. Jack Handle
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
E Flat or Spare Tire
G . Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
Return the jack, ratchet, wheel wrench and jack extensions
to their location behind the passenger’s seat. Secure the
items and replace the jack cover, if there
is one.
5-32
G
2 and &Door Models
A. Nut
E. Jack and Tool
Storage Box
Extended Cab Models
A. Nut
E Ratchet
B. Jack and Tool Cover
G. Wheel Wrench
B. Jack
C. Jack Handle Extension
E Ratchet
C. Jack Handle Extension
H.Jack
D. Wheel Wrench
G . Jack Handle
D. Tool Retainer
I. JackHandle
H. Tool Retainer
E. Jack and Tool
Storage Box
C
E
I
F
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t wantto do when your vehicleis stuck is
to spin your wheels toofast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
’A
I
CAUTION:
I
If you let your tires spinat high speed, theycan
Chassis CabModels
A. Nut
B. Retainer
E Jack and Tool
Storage Box
G. Ratchet
C . Jack Handle
Extension
H. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle Extension
I. ToolRetainer
E. Wheel Wrench
J. Jack
5-34
explode, and you or otherscould be injured.
of the
And, the transmissionor other parts
vehicle can overheat. Thatcould causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 kmlh) as shown
on the speedometer.
I NOTICE:
I
Using the RecoveryHooks
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission
back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains”in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn yoursteering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around yourfront wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST(1) or
SECOND ( 2 ) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmissionis in gear.If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see ”Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.The
recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
5-35
'A
I
CAUTION:
I
The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of
force. Always pull thevehicle straight out. Never
pull onthe hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks
could break off and you or otherscould be
injured from the chain or cable snapping
back.
I NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks totow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could bedamaged and itwould not
be covered by warranty.
5-36
I
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about thecare of your vehicle. This section begins withservice and fuel information,
and then it shows howto check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devotedto its appearance care.
6-2
6- 3
6-4
6-5
6-8
6- 14
6- 15
6- 19
6-2 1
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-32
6-32
Service
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuels in Foreign Countries - - Gasoline
Engines
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Noise Control System
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Air Cleaner Filter (Gasoline Engines)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Four-wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap (Gasoline Engine)
Thermostat
6-33
6-33
6-35
6-39
6-39
6-49
6-50
6-59
6-60
6-64
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-75
6-76
6-78
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper BladeR.eplacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Specifications
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to
do your own service work,
see “Servicing Your Air
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
to be happy withit. We hope you’llgo to your dealer for
You should keepa record with all parts receipts andlist
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine
GM parts and
of any service work you
the mileage and the date
GM-trained and supported service people.
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:
Service
I
@I!!!!!”
n
Delco
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want todo some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper service manual. It tells
you much
more abouthow to service your vehicle than
this manual
can. To order the properservice manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
6-2
You can be injured and yourvehicle could be
damaged if you try to doservice work ona
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners.“English” and “metric”
fasteners canbe easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could behurt.
Adding Equipment tothe Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might addto the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it.This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your GM dealer before adding equipmentto the outside
of your vehicle.
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine,
see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System”in the Diesel Engine
Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or
higher. At a minimum, it should meetspecifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasolinespecifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA)for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meetingthe AAMA
specification could provide improveddriveability and
emission control system protection comparedto
other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at87 octane or higher and you
still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up ahill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle iscertified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorilyon fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turnon andor your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealerfor diagnosis to determine the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the typeof fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadlenyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not
his fuel
contains " T . General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life maybe reduced and your emission control
system performance maybe affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel mayturn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help prevent
deposits from formingin your engine and fuel system,
allowing your emission control system to function
properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything
to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area to help clean the air. General
Motors recommends that you use these gasolines
if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don't use it. It can corrode
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-4
I NOTICE: (Continued)
I
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries-- Gasoline
Engines
If you plan on driving in another country outsidethe
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn't be covered
by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, askan auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does businessin the
country whereyou'll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tellus where you're going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL 1 H 8P7
Filling Your Tank
For vehicles equipped with the“VORTEC” 4300 engine,
the fuel cap is located on the left side of your vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with
the “VORTEC” 5000,5700,
7400 and 6.5L engines, the
fuel cap is located on the
left side of your vehicle.
On a chassis-cab model, refuel the front tank
first,
or in instances whenonly a partial fuel fill is desired.
An automatic transfer mechanism will maintain
approximately equal fuel levels in both tanks,so
no switching is required by the operator.
.-
‘P
i
’ION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.
It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-5
7400 and 6.5L engines,
hang the cap inside the
fuel filler door.
To take off the cap, turnit slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
“VORTEC”
While refueling vehicles equipped with the
4300 engine, let the cap hang by the tether below the
fuel filler neck.
6-6
/1\ CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on
you if you open the
fuel filler cap too
quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap
slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right
type. Your dealer canget one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not
fit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
6-7
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood
I A CAUTION:
If your vehicle has airconditioning, the auxiliary
engine fan under thehood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and
tools away from any
underhood electricfan.
t
-4
Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start afire. These includeliquids like gasoline or
diesel fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield
washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You or otherscould be burned. Be careful
not to drop orspill things thatwill burn onto
a hotengine.
Hood Release
To open the hood,
first pull the handle
inside the vehicle.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hoodrelease, located just to the passenger’s
side of the centerof the grill.
Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on
properly. Pull down the hood and close
it firmly.
6-9
“VORTEC” 4300,5000,5700 Engine
When you lift up the hood you’ll see:
“VORTEC” 5700 engine shown, locations for other engines similar.
6-10
A. Battery
H. Fan
B. Air Cleaner
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Radiator Cap
J. EngineOilFill
D. Coolant Recovery Tank
E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Dipstick
M. Fuse/Relay Center
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
6-11
3
B
6-12
I
A. Battery
H. Engine Oil Fill
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
I. Fan
C. Air Cleaner
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D.
E.
E
G.
Radiator Cap
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
Air Filter Restriction Indicator
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
M. FuseRelay Center
Automatic Transmission Dipstick
6-13
Noise Control System
Among those acts presumed to constitute tamperingare
the acts listed below.
The following information relates to compliance with
Insulation:
Federal noise emission standardsfor vehicles with a Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than10,OOO lbs.
0 Removal of the noise shields or underhood insulation.
(4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule provides
Engine:
information on maintaining thenoise control system to
minimize degradationof the noise emission control system 0 Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if
during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system
equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speedto
warranty is given in your Warranty booklet.
exceed manufacturer specifications.
These standards apply onlyto vehicles sold in the
United States.
Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following actsor the
causing thereof:
I . The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other thanfor purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any deviceor element of design
incorporated into any new vehiclefor the purpose
of noise control, priorto its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or whileit is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such deviceor element
of design hasbeen removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Fan and Drive:
0
Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
0
Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
Air Intake:
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
0
Reversing the air cleaner cover.
Exhaust:
0 Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Checking EngineOil
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towelor
cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove
it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
It’s a good ideato check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In orderto get an accurate reading, theoil must
be warm and the vehicle must on
be level ground.
When to Add Oil
The engine oil dipstick hasa yellow ring handle and is
located on the passenger’s side
of the engine.
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to addat least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind
of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan.
If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-15
1
I
I NOTICE:
I
Don’t add too much
oil. If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that showsthe proper operating range,
your engine couldbe damaged.
I
The engine oil fill cap
for the “VORTEC”4300,
5000 and 5700 engines are
located on the driver’s side
engine valve cover.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starbuk” symbol. This symbol
indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburstsymbol.
.
I
If you change your ownoil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol onthe
front of the oil container.
If you have youroil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American PetroleumInstitute
certified for gasoline engines.
The engine oil fill cap for the “VORTEC” 7400 engine
is located at the front of the engine.
Be sure tofill it enough to put the level somewherein
the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstickall the way
back in when you’re through.
You should also use the proper viscosityoil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
RECOMMENDED SAE YlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTEDTEMPERATURERANGE.
LWK
Fm THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
I
I
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
to be 0°F (- 18°C) or above. These numbers onan oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperaturefalls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
SAE 5w-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2ow-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-17
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anythingto your oil. Your GM dealer is ready
to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the shorttripkity
maintenance schedule:
0
0
0
If none of them is true, use the longtriphighway
every
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter
7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months whichever
occurs first. Drivinga vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine to
oil
break down slower.
--
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine
oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay
on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
water, or a good hand cleaner,
Wash or properly throw
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.
(See
You operate your vehiclein dusty areasor
the manufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal
off-road frequently.
of oil products.)
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
You frequently tow a trailer.
0
The vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine
oil to
break down sooner. If any
one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
6-18
Used oil can be a real threatto the environment.If you
change your own oil, be sure
to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground,into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines)
The air cleaner assembly
has an indicator that lets
you know when the airfilter
is dirty and needsto be
serviced. The indicator is
located in the air intake
tube between theair cleaner
and the engine.
See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Indexto
determine when to check the indicator.
Your air cleaner is located between the battery and
coolant recovery tank.
If the areainside the clear sectionof the indicator is
green, no air filter service is required. When thearea
inside the indicator is orange andCHANGE AIR
FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced.
6-19
..
Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop
on the duct.
To remove the air filter, unhook the retainingclips and
remove the cover.Lift the filter and the connected duct
out of the air cleaner housing. Hold the duct and remove
the filter by both pulling and twisting the filter away
from the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
Install the duct and the
filter into the air cleaner housing.
Make sure that the ductfits properly into the housing.
Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the
filter housing.
After the air filter is properly serviced, the indicator
should be reset. Push the button on top
of the indicator
to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone.
6-20
Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services”
in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Operating the enginewith the air cleaner off
can causeyou OF others tobe burned. The air
cleaner notonly cleans the air,it stops flameif
the engine backfires.
If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires,you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with theair cleaneroff.
Change both thefluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s CVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause
a
damaging enginefire. And, dirt caneasily get
into yourengine, which will damage it. Always
have theair cleaner in place
when you’re driving.
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over
8,600 and you do
not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, the
fluid and filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation canbe a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sureto follow all the instructions
here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
6-22
To get the right reading, the fluid should
be at normal
operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200 "F
(82°C to 93°C).
Checking Transmission FluidHot
Get the vehicle warmed upby driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than50°F ( 10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steadyfor 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engineoff and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five
minutes if outside temperaturesare 50°F ( 10°C) or
more. If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check,you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
0
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
1. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the
rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger's
side. Flip the handle u p and then pullout the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2 . Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the
of the proper fluidto
fluid level is low, add only enough
bring the levelup to the HOT area fora hot check. It
doesn’t takemuch fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Don ’t [email protected]
NOTICE:
I
We recommend youuse only fluid labeled
[email protected], because fluid with that label
is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. Check both sidesof the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in theHOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock thedipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluidto use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.
6-24
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “HOWto Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in allthe way; then flip the handle
down to lock thedipstick in place.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checkedis when the engine oil is
changed. However,the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’t require changing.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a falsereading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
fall on hot engine
the fluid could come out and
parts or exhaust system parts, starting
a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate readingyou
if check your
transmission fluid.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug andbe sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and Whatto Use
Here’s howto add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid
to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
y
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch system in your vehicle
is
self-adjusting. A slight amount of play(114 inch to
1/2 inch or6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal.
It isn’t a good ideato “top off’ your clutch fluid. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
k
I
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule,
Owner
Checks
and Services, to determine
how often you should check
the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper fluid.
See “Owner Checks
and Services” and
“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check
The proper fluid should be added
if the leveldoes not
reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it’s in place
in
the reservoir.See the instructions on the reservoir
cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check and ChangeLubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often to check the lubricant and whento change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” inthe Index.
6-26
How to Check Lubricant
C3 (3500 HD) Trucks Equipped with
Dana Rear Axle
Additional rear axle scheduled maintenance is required
on 3500 HD models equipped withDana rear axles
when they are driven under the followingconditions:
Extreme loading (at or near GVWR) or trailer
towing, and:
Operation above 45 mph (70 km/h) for extended
periods oftime.
Vehicles used in anyof these conditions require the rear
30,000 miles (50 OOO km).
axle lubricant be changed every
Fluid capacityis 4.12 quarts (3.9 L).
Four-wheel Drive
If the level is below the bottom of thefiller plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole.
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that needlubrication.
What to Use
Transfer Case
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom
of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
If the level is below the bottomof the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant.
6-28
-
If the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottomof
the filler plug hole.
If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise
the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
A 50/50 mixture of water and the propercoolant for
your vehicle will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
0
Give boiling protection up to 265“F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
What toUse
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
new [email protected] coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or
150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only [email protected] life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning gages work as they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, is
it important thatyou use
only [email protected](silicate-free)coolant.
If coolant other than [email protected]
is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosionmay result. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage causedby the use
of coolant other than [email protected]
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water(preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL’ coolant which
If you use this mixture,
won’t damage aluminum parts.
you don’t needto add anything else.
A CAUTION:
Adding only plain waterto your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can
boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your enginecould
get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine couldcatch fire andyou or
others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water [email protected]
6-30
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant
mix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the
mix can freeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you haveto add coolant more than
four times a year,
have your dealer check your
cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,
you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve thesystem. These canbe harmful.
Checking Coolant
Adding Coolant
If your vehicle hasa diesel engine, see “Checking
Coolant” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
If you need morecoolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
A CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can
allow steam and
scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost
never have to add coolant
at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator are
hot.
--
--
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, butbe careful
not to spill it.
The coolant recovery tank is locatedon the passenger’s
side at the rearcorner of the engine compartment.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark, or a
little higher.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot
engine.
6-31
~
.
Radiator PressureCap
(Gasoline Engine)
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi
(105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature iscontrolled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through theradiator until thecoolant
reaches a preset temperature.
The radiator pressurecap must be tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap linedup with the overflow tube on
the radiatorfiller neck.
6-32
When you replace yourthermostat, an [email protected]
is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When theengine compartment is cool, wipe thecap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew thecap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove thecap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should beat the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary toregularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Index.
Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hosesand seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer
fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’sinstructions before use.If you will be
operating your vehiclein an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
6-33
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTICE:
0
0
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tankis full.
6-34
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solutionfreeze
to
and damage your washer
fluid tank and
other partsof the washersystem. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washerfluid.
Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer systemand paint.
Brakes
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
Brake Fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get newbrake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, thefluid
level goes back up.The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake systemfixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
I
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brakefluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco [email protected](GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brakefluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brakefluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removingit. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
'A
You can check the brake
fluid without takingoff the cap.
Just look at the window on the brakefluid reservoir. The
fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it isn't, have your
brake system checkedto see if there is a leak.
After workis done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above MIN and below thetop of
the window.
6-36
CAUTION:
With the wrongkind of fluid in your brake
or they
system, your brakes may not work well,
maynotevenworkatall.Thiscouldcausea
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
~
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
If you have a C 3500 HD model, it has four-wheel disc
brakes without wearindicators. If you ever hear a brake
rubbing noise, have the brake linings inspected.
If your pickup is not a C 3500 HD model, it has front
disc brakes and reardrum brakes.
Disc brake pads (except C 3500 HD models) have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be
heard all thetime your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
The brake wear warning sound means soon
that
your brakeswon’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads
could result incostly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nutsare necessary to help
prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenlytorque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, havethe rear brake linings inspected. Also, the
rear brake drums shouldbe removed and inspected each
time the tiresare removed for rotation or changing.
When you havethe front brake pads replaced, havethe
rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete
axle sets.
S e e “Brake System Inspection” in Section7 of this manual
under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to
normal height, or if there isa rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you makea brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
If your brake pedal goes down
farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may needadjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applyingthe brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system ona modern vehicle iscomplex.
Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake liningswear
down and you have to have new ones put -in be sure
you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakesmay no longer. work properly. For
example, if someone putsin brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can changein many
other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Every new vehicle has a Delco [email protected] You
never have to add water toone of these. When it’s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that allthe lamps
are off and theengine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulbs
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
25 for
days or more,
take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
A CA“T1ON:
Batteries haveacid that can burnyou and gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt
if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around
a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
-N:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and
can burstif you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or
others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
Sealed Beam Lamps
1. Removethe
four screws from the
headlamp retainer.
4. Plug in the new headlamp and putit in place.
5. Install the retainer to the headlamp and tighten
the screws.
2. Pull the headlampout and remove the retainer.
6-40
Composite Headlamps
1. Remove the two screws
at the top of the
radiator support.
4. Turn the bulb
counterclockwise
and remove it.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it to
the right until itis tight.
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
6 . Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the two screws.
Front lhm Signal Lamps
(Sealed Beam Headlamps)
I
4. Pull the socketout of the
lamp assembly.
1. Remove the two screws
at the inside edge of
the parking/turn signal
lamp assembly.
5. Push in gentlyon the bulb, turnit counterclockwise
and removeit from the socket.
2. Remove the lamp assemblyby swinging it out from
the inside edge and sliding
it out at the outside edge.
3. Squeeze the tab on the sideof the lamp socket while
turning the socket counterclockwise.
6. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently press on
in
the bulb and turnit to the right untilit is tight.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it to the right untilit locks.
8. Put the parkinghum signal lamp assembly backinto
the vehicle and tighten the screws.
6-42
Front 'hrn Signal Lamps
(Composite Headlamps)
1. Remove the screws and
take out the parkingkurn
signal lamp assembly.
4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise
and remove it from the socket.
2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while
turning the socket counterclockwise.
5. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently press in on
the bulb and turn itto the right until itis tight.
6. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it to the right until it locks.
7. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle andtighten the screws.
2. Turn the bulb socket
Fender MarkerLamps
(Dual Rear Wheel Pickup Models)
..
,
.
.
..
... . . .
counterclockwise and
remove it from the
lens assembly.
1. Remove the screws and
take
fender
the marker
assembly out of
the
fender.
3. Pull the bulb straight outof the socket.
4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push
it in until it
is tight.
5. Put the socket back into the lens assembly and turnit
clockwise to tighten it.
6. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.
6-44
3. Pull the bulb straight out
of the socket.
Sidemarker Lamps
1. Remove the screws and
pull out the parkinghum
signal lamp assembly.
4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push itin until it
is tight.
2. Reach through the opening and turn the sidemarker
bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it.
5. Put the socket back into the sidemarker assembly
and turn it clockwise to tighten it.
6. Replace the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly and
tighten the screws.
Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)
I
4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.
2. Pull the old bulb straightout of the socket.
6-46
Roof Marker Lamps
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lens.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it
is tight.
n
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate
latch and pull out
the lamp assembly.
4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.
Tailgate Marker Lamps
1. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the lensbulb
assembly from the lens holder.
2. Unplug the lensbulb assembly at the connector wire.
3. Plug in a new lensbulb assembly and push the
connector wire into the hole in thetailgate.
4. Snap the lensbulb assembly into the lens holder.
Taillamps (Pickup Models)
1 . Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the screws
from the bulbretainer
and take it off the
lamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb straight
out of the socket.
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
1. Using your hands, peel the rubber seal away from
the lens.
2. Lift the lens off the
lamp assembly.
5. Put in a new bulb and push it in until it is tight.
P
6. Replace the bulb retainer.
7. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
8. Close the tailgate.
6-48
3. Slide the socket outof the lamp assembly.
4. Push in gently on
the bulb, turn it
counterclockwise and
remove it from
the socket.
d
i
”
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
For proper type and length,see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index. To replace the
windshield wiper blade assembly:
I
A
I
IA
5. Put in a new bulb and, pushing in gently, turn it
clockwise until it istight.
6. Put the socket back in the lamp assembly and replace
the lens and lens seal.
1. Lift the wiper arm and rotatethe blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
I
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires madeby
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see
your GM Warranty booklet for details.
-
0
A CAUTION:
0
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could havean air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-50
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should
be checked
when your tiresare cold.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be
cut, punctured or broken
by a sudden
impact such aswhen you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
0
Inflation
-- Tire
Pressure
The Certificationmirelabel, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document
in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
You can operate some vehicles at reducedinflation
pressures only when you’ll becarrying reduced loads.
On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures
for a typical reduced loadare printed on the Improved
Ride Tire Pressure label located on thedriver’s door.
Weigh the vehicle to find the load on eachtire and see
the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for
that load.
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tireoverloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusualwear
Bad handling
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards.
6-51
-
When to Check
Check your tires oncea month or more. Also,check the
tire pressure of the sparetire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properlyinflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
The purpose of regular rotation is toachieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Indexfor scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
FRT
FRT
I
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and
check
wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for
New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement”later in this section for more
information. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels,
also
see “Dual Tire Operation” later inthis section.
6-52
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always
use one of
the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
If your vehicle hasfront tires with different load ranges
or tread designs (such asall season vs. odoff road) than
the reartires, don’t rotate your tiresfront to rear.
n
111
V
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the
load range
and tread designfor your front tires is the same as your
rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns
shown here whenrotating your tires.
111
If your vehicle has dual rear
wheels and the loadrange
or tread designfor your
front tires is different from
your rear tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern
shown herewhen rotating
your tires.
The dual tires are rotated as
a pair, and theinside rear
tires become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheelson each side arelined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificatiomire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on theparts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if you
need to, to get allthe rust or dirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” inthe Index.)
6-54
When It’s Time forNew Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if anyof the following statements
are true:
0 You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cutor snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0 The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location
of the damage.
Dual Tire Operation
Buying New Tires
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt
or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheelnut torque after
100, 1,OOO and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 OOO km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque” in
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look
at the CertificationEire label.
the Index.
The outer tireon a dual wheel setup generally wears faster
than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more evenly and
last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.If you’re
going to be doing a lot of driving on high-crown roads,
you can reduce tire wear by adding 5 psi (35 kPa) to the
tire pressure in the outer tires.Be sure to return to the
recommended pressures when no longer driving under
those conditions. See “Changinga Flat Tire” in the
Index for more information.
If you operate your vehicle witha tire that is badly
underinflated, the tire can overheat. An overheated
tire can lose air suddenlyor catch fire.You or others
could be injured. Be sure all tires (including the
spare, if any) are properly inflated.
The tires installed on your vehiclewhen it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get newtires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle willcontinue to have tires thatare designed
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating andconstruction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tiresof different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
L
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which gradestires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary usespare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucksmay vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on
the wear rateof the tire when tested undercontrolled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
( 1 1/2) times as well onthe government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actualconditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades,from highest to lowest,are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stopon wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet underthe
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum requiredby law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longesttire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset.If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to berebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheelyou need.
Each new wheel shouldhave the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width,offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts
or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
I a CAUTION:
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect thebraking and handling
of your
vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou
lose control. You could have acollision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts
for replacement.
I NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearanceto the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel boltor wheel nut is replaced
nut torque after
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel
100, 1,000and 6,000 miles ( 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque,see “Wheel Nut Torque’’
in the Index.
6-58
~
~
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous.
You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s
been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an
accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a
new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
I NOTICE:
If your vehicle has dualwheels or P26975R16 size
tires, don’tuse tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device onlyif its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle,
drive slowly, readjust orremove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install
them on the rear
tires.
If you don’t have dualwheels or if you have a
tire size other thanP265175R16,use tire chains
only where legaland only whenyou must. Use
chains that are the proper
size for yourtires.
Install them on the tires
of the rearaxle.
Don’t use chains on the tires
of the frontaxle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burstinto flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumesin a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sureto follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors
or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
0
CarbonTetrachloride
0
Acetone
0
PaintThinner
Turpentine
LacquerThinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-59
Don’t use any of these unlessthis manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
0
Alcohol
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’tsaturate the stained area.
LaundrySoap
5. If a ring forms after spotcleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
Bleach
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
ReducingAgents
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinylor leather with a clean, damp cloth.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitchor welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on the containerlabel.
Your GM dealer hastwo cleaners, a solvent-type spot
lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rubit roughly.
normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on
vinyl or leather.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section,use a sponge
to remove the suds.
Here are some cleaning tips:
1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and changeto a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-60
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Fabric Protection
First, see if you haveto use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots andstains will clean offbetter with just
water and mildsoap.
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
treated with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a3M
product. It protectsfabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet oftento keep it looking new.
If you needto use a solvent:
1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper.
2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and cleancloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start
at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” towardthe center.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
Special Cleaning Problems
3. Keep changingto a clean sectionof the cloth.
Greasy or Oily Stains
4. When you clean a stain fromfabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryerto help prevent a
cleaning ring.
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tarand asphalt will stain if left
on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed as
soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will
dissolve them and may cause them to spread.
6-61
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused bycatsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Use warm water anda clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area withcool water.
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don’t get themoff quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinylAeather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
Cleaning Leather
3. If an odor lingersafter cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water anda mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe drywith a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If
dirt is allowed to work into thefinish, it can harm
the leather.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknownstains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
3. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
6-62
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Don’t useabrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on theinside rear
window, since they may haveto be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the
inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not beattached across the
defogger grid.
Use only mildsoap and waterto clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Keep belts clean and dry.
A
CAUTION:
I
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Glass
Glass should becleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiperblade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be onthe blade
or windshield.
Clean the outsideof the windshield withGM Windshield
(non-scratching glass cleaning
Cleaner, Bon
powder), GM Part No. 1050011 or equivalent. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form whenyou rinse
it with water.
A
m
i
@
Grime from the windshield will stick
to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade
by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary;
replace blades that look worn.
6-63
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During
very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.)
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soapto clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow the
instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s frnish
is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (milddetergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaningagents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and waterspotting.
High pressurecar washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxingor mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your GM manufactured vehiclemay have a
“basecoatklearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives
more depthand gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always
use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made
for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
~
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage yourvehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may usechrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to highpolish, is recommended
for all bright metalparts.
Aluminum or Chrome Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheelsclean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse withclean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry witha soft clean towel. A wax
may then beapplied.
The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t usestrong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on
chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the
wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle throughan automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner.
If your vehicleis damaged and requiressheet metal
repair or replacement, makesure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restorecorrosion protection.
NOTICE:
~~
-
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
of the vehicle.
surfaces on the body or wheels
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
6-66
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.
Bare metal will corrode
quickly and maydevelop into a major repairexpense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from yourdealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather andatmospheric conditiow &n cr&ite a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy,ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Cleanany areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed inclosed areas
of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damagedby this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and soldby
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-68
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
111 111111111II
SAMPLE4UXVM072675
f
IS1
1
E N G I N E A 7
CODE
MODEL YEAR
yourVIN,
I
ASSEMBLY
PLANT
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
the model designation,
0
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
6-69
Electrical System
Headlamps
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The headlamp wiring is protected byan internal circuit
go
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to
on and off, or in some cases to remain off.If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motoris protected by a circuit
breaker anda fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to getit fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protectthe power windows and other
Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting to power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the
add anythingelectrical to your vehicle,see “Servicing
circuit until the problemis fixed or goes away.
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
6-70
-
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio orcigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as youcan.
Instrument Panel FuseBlock
The fuse block access door
is on thedriver’s side edge
of the instrument panel. Pull
off the cover to access the
fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuseextractor. The fuse
extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door. To
remove fuses if you don’t havea fuseextractor, hold the
finger
end of the fuse between your thumb and index
and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behindthe fuse block
access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.
However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
6-71
FuseEircuit
Breaker
4
J
0 3
0 4
0 7
D OiQ
U13
FusdCircuit
Usage
Breaker
1
2
3
6-72
Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer,
CHMSL,
Hazard Lamps, Stoplamps
Transfer Case
Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp, Glove
Box Lamp, DomeReading Lamps,
Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors
10
11
12
13
14
Usage
Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay,
Lamp Switch, Keyless Entry, Low
Coolant Module, Illuminated Entry
Module, DRAC (Diesel Engine)
Not Used
Cruise Control
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Air Bag System
License Lamp, Parking Lamps,
Taillamps, Roof Marker Lamps,
Tailgate Lamps,Front Sidemarkers,
Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch
Illumination, Fender Lamps,
Headlamp Switch Illumination
Air Bag System
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
A/C, A/C Blower, High
Blower Relay
Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door
Lock Relay, Power Lumbar Seat
4WD Indicator, Cluster, Comfort
Controls, Instrument Switches,
Radio Illumination, Chime Module
FuseKircuit
Breaker
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A
B
Underhood Fusemelay Center
Usage
DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay
Front and Rear Turn Signals,
Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid
Radio (Ignition)
LCWALNCM, ABS, Cruise Control
Radio (Battery)
PRNDL, Automatic Transmission,
Speedometer, Check Gages
Warning Light
Variable Effort Steering
Not Used
Not Used
Front Axle, 4WDIndicator Lamp,
TP2 Relay (Gasoline Engine)
Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power
Seat, Keyless Entry Module
Power Windows
The underhood fusehelay center is located in the rear
of the engine compartment near the brakefluid
reservoir. Move the retainerclips for the cover to
access the fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. Thefuse
extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block. To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger
and pull straight out.
Name
FUEL SOL
GLOW PLUG
HORN
AUX FAN
ECM- 1
NC
ENG- 1
LIGHTING
Name
ECM-B
RR DEFOG
IGN-E
6-74
Usage
Fuel Pump, PCMNCM
Rear Window Defogger
Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil,A/C
Compressor Relay, HotFuel
Module, Dual Tanks
BATT
IGN-A
IGN-B
ABS
BLOWER
STOP/HAZ
Usage
Fuel Solenoid (Diesel Engine)
Glow plugs (Diesel Engine)
Horn, Underhood Lamps
Auxiliary Fan
Injectors, PCMNCM
Air Conditioning
lgnition Switch, EGR, Canister
Purge, EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid,
Heated 02, Fuel Heater
(Diesel Engine), Water Sensor
(Diesel Engine)
Headlamp and Panel Dimmer
Switch, Fog and Courtesy Fuses
Battery, FuseBlock Busbar
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Hi Blower Relay
Stoplamps
Replacement Bulbs
Quantity
Number
Exterior
Lamps
SealedHeadlamps
Beam
Low-Beam
Composite
Headlamps
High-Beam
Composite
Headlamps
Front Marker Lamp
Front Parking and Turn
Lamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn
Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Fender MarkerLamp
Roof Marker Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp
Underhood Lamp
Underhood Reel Lamp
2
H6054
2
9006
2
9005
2
194
4
2357NA
2
2
3057
3057
3156
194
194
194
92 1
1
1
93
232
Interior Lamps
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
Door Courtesy Lamps
Four- Wheel- Drive
Indicator
Four-Wheel-Drive Shift
Lever
Instrument Panel
Compartment Lamp
Ashtray Lamp
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
Quantity
2
2
2
Number
211-2
211-2
1
194
194
1
194
1
194
1
194
74
1
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index for more information.
Engine
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
Type
V6
V8
V8
V8
VIN Code
W
M
R
J
Spark Plug Gap
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Model
C 1500
K 1500 andC/K 2500
C/K 2500 (w/C6P)
C/K 3500 (Single Rear Wheels)
C/K 3500 (Dual Rear Wheels)
C 3500 HD Front
C 3500 HD Rear
Tire Pressure
6-76
Description
140 lb-ft (190N-m)
5 bolts (14mm)
140 lb-ft ( 190 Nam)
6 bolts (14mm)
140 lb-ft( 190 N-m)
8 bolts (14mm)
140 lb-ft ( 190 N-m)
8 bolts (14mm)
140 lb-ft ( 190 N-m)
8 bolts (14mm)
175 lb-ft (240N-m)
5 bolts (5/8 in.)
175 lb-ft (240 N-m)
10 bolts(5/8 in.)
See the CertificatiodTire label on the rear edgeof the driver’s door
or the incomplete vehicle document
in the cab.
Torque
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information
available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same asthe part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer's publications.
VIN Code
Oil Filter*
Air Cleaner Filter*
PCV Valve*
Spark Plugs*
Fuel Filter*
Wiper Blades**
Wiper Blade Type
Wiper Blade Length
W
PF52
A 1300C
CV746C
4 1-932
GF626
22 154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
M
R
J
PF1218T
A 1300C
CV796C
41 -932
GF626
22154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
PF1218T
A 1300C
CV796C
4 1-932
GF626
22154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
PF1218
A 1300C
cv774c
4 1-932
GF626
22154886
Trico
18 inches (45.0 cm)
*AC part number
**GM part number
?Use a PF52 oil filter if your vehicle has four-wheeldrive.
6-77
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling
System” in the Index.
Engine
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700
“VORTEC” 7400
“VORTEC”
7400 w/3500HD
VIN
W
M
R
J
J
Quantity
13 quarts (12.3 L)
17.5 quarts (16.6 L)
17.5 quarts (16.6L)
25 quarts (23.5L)
28.5 quarts (27 L)
After refill, the level must be rechecked.See “Engine
Oil” in theIndex.
VIN
W
M
R
J
Quantity with Filter?
4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
5 quarts (4.8 L)
5 quarts (4.8 L)
7 quarts (6.5 L)
?Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
L) for C-3500HD Models.
*Add one additional quart (.946
6-78
Type
Short Bed
Long Bed
Standard CrewCab
Chassis-Cab Side Tank
Chassis-Cab Rear Tank
3500 HD Models Side Tank
3500 HD Models RearTank
Quantity
26 gallons (98 L)
34 gallons (128L)
34 gallons (128L)
22 gallons (83 L)
18 gallons (68L)
22 gallons (83 L)
18 gallons (68L)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)
Engine
“VORTEC” 4300
“VORTEC” 5000
“VORTEC” 5700”
“VORTEC” 7400*
Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
Not all air conditioningrefrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant
is used.
If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer.
See the refrigerant charge label under the hoodfor
information regarding refrigerant capacity.
-
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs theseservices to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-7
7-3 1
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
Long Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
7-45
7-49
7-5 1
7-54
?art B: Owner Checks and Services
?art C : Periodic Maintenance Inspections
?art D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants
E: Maintenance Record
a
'rt
IMPORTANT:
I
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your
GM dealer for details.
7-2
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenancenot only helpsto keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even
affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessaryequipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt,have a qualified
technician do thework.
If you are skilled enoughto do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
“Part B: Owner Checks andServices” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
explains
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
important inspections that your GM dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their
equivalents, should be used whetheryou do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performedon your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance shouldbe done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehiclefor
warranty repairs.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou may drive itto work,
to do errands orin many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use
their GM
vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive.If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
parts shouldbe replaced and all necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
0
carry passengers andcargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificatioflire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
are driven off-road in the recommended manner.See
“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle’’ in the Index.
0
use the recommended fuel. See“Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll needto decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s howto decide which
schedule to follow:
This part tells you the maintenanceservices you should
have done and when you should
schedule them. If you
go to yourdealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.
Gasoline engine vehicles anddiesel engine vehicles
have different maintenance requirements. If you have
a
diesel engine, follow a schedule designatedfor diesel
engine vehicles only.
The proper fluidsand lubricants to use are listedin Part D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All
See the Diesel Engine Supplementfor diesel engine
maintenance schedules.
7-4
Maintenance Schedule
-
Short Trip/City Definition
-- Gasoline Engines
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true foryour vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
You frequently tow a trailer.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasonsyou should follow this scheduleif you
operate your vehicle under anyof these conditions is that
these conditions cause engineoil to break down soonel:
Short Trip/City Intervals
-- Gasoline Engines
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs fmt).
Short Trip/City Intervals
-- Gasoline Engines
Every 6,000 Miles (10000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only). Front Wheel Bearing Repack(2WD
only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) ValveInspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
Maintenance Schedule
I
1 Long Trip/Highway Intervals-- Gasoline Engines
~~~
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Da not usethis schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven ina dusty area or used
off paved roads. Usethe Short Trip/City schedulefor
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower:
Every 7,500 Miles(12500 km): Engine Oil andFilter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
Chassis Lubrication (or every12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 OOO km): Shields and
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only).
7-6
~
~~
~
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack(2WD only)
(or at each brake relining, whichever occursfiist).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over8600 GVWR or
driven under severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. FuelTank, Cap and Lines
Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule =- Gasoline Engines
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge
that all recommended maintenance servicesbe performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline
center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake
pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin bushings should
not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F
(- 12°C) orhigher, or they could be damaged.
+ A good time to check your brakesis during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection’’ under“Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule.
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill atfirst
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and addfluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areasor towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
e Standard Differential-- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at everyoil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drainfluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
More frequent lubrication may be required
for
heavy-duty or off-road use.
0
3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme
overloadtrailer towing conditions and high-speed
(above 45 mph or 70 km/h) conditions for extended
periods of time must have the drive axle fluid changed
every 30,000miles (50 OOO km). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
1
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule =- Gasoline Engines
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(See footnote #.).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-10
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is aNoise Emission
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in
the United States.
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
21,000 Miles (35000 km)
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
I
DATE
7-12
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:^
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
(SERVICED
BY:^
1
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
27.000 Miles (45 000 km)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
(Continued)
u
4 4
I I
Short Trip/City Maintenance’schedule== Gasoline Engines I
30,000 Mikes (50 000 km) (Continued)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,5.00lbs.
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace asrequired. This is a Noise Emission
Control Sewice. .Applicable only tu vehicles soldin
the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire
Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
7-14
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVLCED BY:
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
c3 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-15
--
Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See
footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote ** .)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
7-16
BY
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-= Gasoline Engines I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles
sold in
the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
7-17
--
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change automatic transmission fluid
When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR isover
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularlyreaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
lf you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
I
7-18
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:)
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-= Gasoline Engines I
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICEDBY:
7-19
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote * * .)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whicheveroccurs first).
DATE
7-20
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule== Gasoline Engines
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
1
condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly (if equipped). Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote ?.)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system inspection as described in the
service manual. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Conduct evaporative control system
inspection, Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
I
I
7-21
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
C
l Lubricate chassis components
(or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
I7 Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote * *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leakmg. (See footnote** .)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY.
I
l
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
[7 Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
ACTUAL MILEAGE
3
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
7-23
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
7-24
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This isa Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule =- Gasoline Engines
I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
I7 Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
joints and axle seals for leaking.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
(See footnote **.)
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
t
DATE
ACTUALMILEAGESERVICED
BY
7-25
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-= Gasoline Engines
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote * *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
I
7-26
BY
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
==
Gasoline Engines
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
Cl For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-27
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
93,000 Miles (155000 km)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED
BY
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
7-28
....
BYJ
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines [
99,000 Miles (145 000 km)
100,000 Miles (144 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Inspect spark plug wires.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainlydriven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 9OoF
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(Continued)
7-29
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
=- Gasoline Engines
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of
these conditions, the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV)
valve. An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
I
7-30
I
BY:
I
I
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant’’ in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressurecap.
An Emission Control Service.
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasdin-
The services shown in this schedule upto 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ following.
+ A good time to check your brakes is duringtire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluidas needed.
0
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every engine oil change.
0
3500 HD Models with applications requiring
high-speed (above 45 mph or 70 kmh) operation for
extended periods of time must have the drive axle
fluid changed every 30,000 miles (50 000 km).
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the
failure to perform this maintenance item willnot nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge
that all recommended maintenance servicesbe performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline
center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake
pedal springs. Balljoints and kingpin bushings should
not be lubricated unless their temperature is10O F
(- 12°C) orhigher, or they could be damaged.
7-31
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines
1
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-32
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicnble only to vehicles sold in
the United Stutes.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
ACTUALMILEAGESERVICED
BY
7-33
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 1
I 30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drivevehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote? .)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
~
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
SERVICED BY:^
1 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
37,500Miles (62 500 km)
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
I7 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. ( S e e footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
(Continued)
7-35
I
Long Tripkiighway Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
45,000 Miles (75 000km) (Continued)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
I7 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
0Change automatic transmission fluid
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace asrequired. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in
the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
ACTUAL MILEAGE
DATE SERVICED
7-36
BY:
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
I Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
1 52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of
Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
-
A n Emissiorz Control Scrvic‘e.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
these conditions, the
jluid andfilterdo not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-37
I
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline-Engines
I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-38
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
-- Gasoline Engines I
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system inspection as described in the
service manual. An Emission Corztrol Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Conduct evaporative control system
inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and
condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote ?.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED B Y I
7-39
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Cl Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote * * .)
0 Vehicles With GVWR Above8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damageor looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
7-40
BY
1 Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedule -- GasolineEngines 1
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
A n Emi.rsiorz Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
17 Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote* *.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
(Continued)
7-41
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
(See footnote?.)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
12 months, whichever occurs first).
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
-.
DATE
7-42
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
I
100,000 Miles (144000 km)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
0Inspect spark plug wires.
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
An Emission Control Service.
0Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:(
(Continued)
n
A-
I -43
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)
When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
-- Gasoline Engines
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
If you do not useyour vehicle under any of
these conditions, the fluid and.filterdo not
require changing.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(Pcv)valve. An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
~~
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
SERVICED B Y
1
BY
-
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks andservices which
to help
should be performed at the intervals specified
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant’’ in the
Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,as shown
in Part D.
At the First100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160,1600 and 10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheelnut
torque. For proper torque, see “WheelNut Torque” in
the Index.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is importantfor you or ~1 service station attendant to
per$orm these underhood checks ut eachjbtelfiE1.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and addthe proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to thecorrect pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
7-45
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare
working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged
safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it
repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any openedor broken air bag coverings,
and have them repairedor replaced. (Theair bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear wornor damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check
Your vehicle has anindicator on the engine thatlets you
know when theair cleaner filter is dirty and needsto be
changed. Check indicator at least twice a yearor when
your oil is changed.See “Air Cleaner” in the Index for
more information. Inspect yourair cleaner filter
7-46
restriction indicator more oftenif the vehicle is used in
dusty areas or under off road conditions.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission” inthe Index. Check the system for
leaks. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluidlevel; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index.A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in
this system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repairedat once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all fuel doors, body hood and body door
hinges, tailgate and tailgate handle pivotpoints, latches,
locks and foldingseat hardware. Part D tells you what to
use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
’ A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, youor others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, andbe
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear.The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine.The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
Brake-’Ikansmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
I A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does,
you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked ona
level surface.
7-47
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
3. With the engineoff, turn the key to the RUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular
brake, try to movethe shift leverout of PARK (P)
of
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
I
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, to
tryturn
the ignition key toLOCK in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK
(P).
With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE(R).
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
On vehicles with a key release button, try
to turn the key
to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should
turn to LOCK only when you press the key button.
On all vehicles, the key should come
out only in LOCK.
0
7-48
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could beginto move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
of your vehicle in case
sure there is room in front
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shiftto PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let yourGM dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to performthese services may be
found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications’’ in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well asopen seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced
if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect thethrottle linkage for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace
parts as
needed. Replace anycables that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
Drive Axle Service
Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking.
Inspect the complete system.Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake padsfor wear and rotors
for surface condition. For vehicles with rear drum
brakes, also inspect drum brake liningsfor wear and
cracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check
parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your
brakes inspected more often
if your driving habitsor
conditions result in frequent braking.
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive)
Inspection
Every 12 months or atoil change intervals, check front
axle and transfercase and add lubricant when necessary.
Oil the control lever pivot point and all exposed control
linkage. Check vent hoseat transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be
required on off-road use.
7-50
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
USAGE
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part numberor specification may be obtained from your
GM dealer.
~
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine oil with the American
(Gasoline Engine) Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’sengine, see
’*
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
~
Engine Coolant
50150 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench’ [email protected]
or [email protected]@
coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hydraulic Brake
System
’
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
~
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
System
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884- 1 pint,
10500 17- 1 quart, or equivalent).
Manual
Transmission
(5-Speed with
Low Gear,RPO
MW3)
GM GoodwrenchSynthetic
Manual Transmission Gear Oil
(GM Part NO.12346190 - 1 st.),
Castrol syntorq’ LT or equivalent
SAE 75W-90 GL-4 gear oil.
7-51
~~
FLUIDLUBRICANT
USAGE
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
Manual
(GM Part No. 12345349
Transmission
(5-Speed without or equivalent).
Low Gear,
RPO MG5)
Automatic
Transmission
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose lubricant, [email protected]
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Floor Shift
Linkage
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI ## 2
Categorv LB or GC-LB,
~~~
Chassis
Lubrication
7-52
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category GCor GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1051344 or equivalent).
Differential,
Front and Rear
Axle
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or SAE SOW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear
Differential,
Lubricant (GM Part
C3 (HD3500)
No. 12346140) or equivalent.
Trucks With
Dana Rear Axle
Transfer Case
DEXR0N'-111 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
~~
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen' Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Propeller Shaft
SplineLJniversal
Joint and
Propeller Shaft
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI ## 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
USAGE
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
~~
~
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
~~
Hood and Door
Hinges
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seat and
Fuel Door Hinee
Multi-purpose lubricant, [email protected]
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Multi-purpose lubricant, [email protected]
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
I
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Tailgate Handle Multi-Pwpose lubricant, [email protected]
Pivot Points,
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Hinges, Latch
Bolt and L.inkage
Weatherstrip
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. 12346241
or euuivalent).
@
Squeaks
See “Replacement ’arts” in theIndex for recommended
replacement filters valves and sparkplugs.
7-53
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, recordthe
the service
date, odometer reading and who performed
in the boxes providedafter the maintenanceinterval.
Any additional information from ”Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be addedon
the following record pages. Also,you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place tostore them.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
BY
SERVICED
READING
DATE
I
7-54
I
I
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
I
I
Section 8 CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you willfind out how to contact GMC if you needassistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8-10
8-11
8-1 1
8-1 1
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defectsto the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
GMC dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and
up-to-date informationto promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern witha
member of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has
already been reviewed with theSales, Service or Parts
Manager, contact the ownerof the dealershipor the
General Manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member
of dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager
by calling 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782,
Customer Assistance prompt.) In Canada, contact
GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in
Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136
(Spanish)
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315
In other overseas locations, call GM International
Product Center in Canada at (905) 644-4 112.
L..
1
I
I
For prompt assistance, please have
the following information Refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information
available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: booklet for addressesof GM Overseas offices.
0 Your name, address, home and business
When contacting GMC, please remember that your concern
telephone numbers
will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer’s
facilities,
equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest
0 Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
you follow Step One firstif you have a concern.
from the vehicleregistration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
Customer Assistancefor Text
through
windshield.)
the
Telephone (TTY) Users
0 Dealership name and location
To assist customers who are
deaf, hard of hearing,
0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available
0 Nature of concern
at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry user can communicate with GMC
by dialing:
prompt attention. However,if you wish to write GMC,
1-800-GMC-8583. (TTY users in Canada
can
address your inquiry to:
dial 1-800-263-3830.)
GMC Customer Assistance
31 E. Judson Street 1607-04
Pontiac, MI 48342-2230
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005
1908 Colonel SamDrive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-4
Roadside Assistance
1
FZat Tire Change: Installation of spare tire will be
covered at no charge(customer is responsible for repair
or replacement of tire).
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the customer
to get to the nearest service station (up to $4.00) will
be covered.
Jump Start: No-start situations which require a battery
jump start will be covered at nocharge.
Lock Out: Replacement keys or locksmithservice will
be covered at no chargeif you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Deliveryof the replacement key will
be covered at no charge within 10 miles (16 km).
Emergency Towing Service: Towing to the nearest
GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will
be covered.
GMC’s RoadsideAssistance provides stranded owners
with over-the-phone roadside repairs, location of the
nearest GMC dealer or the following special services:
Deluxe Trip Routing: Custom-made, computerized
maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided
free of charge. Maps include pointsof interest and list
GMC dealers along the route. Trip Routing
also includes
a national hotel discount book and
a book of coupons.
State and local maps available upon request. Please
be prepared to furnish your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Trip InterruptionAssistance: GMC will reimburse any
reasonable trip interruption expenses (up to
$500.00)
when directly associated with warranty disablement. Trip
Interruption service covers expenses suchas meals and
overnight lodgingif vehicle disablement occurs at least
150 miles (240 km) from your home or rental property.
Please Note: you will be requiredto obtain prior
approval from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay
for
expenses at the time of disablement. Original receipts
should be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for
reimbursement. A service representative will provide
assistance when you call.
8-6
The Roadside Assistanceservices listed are available
to retail and retail lease customersoperating 1997 GMC
light duty trucksfor a period of 3 years/36,000 miles
(60 000 km). All services must be pre-arrangedby
GMC Roadside Assistance.
Over-the-phone assistance, such as providing the name
of the closestdealer or minor technical advice,etc., is
available to all owner/operatorsof GMC trucks,
regardless of vehicle or mileage.
Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Roadside
Assistance prompt) to reacha qualified representative
who can assist you.
Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the
following information when your call is received:
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have extensive
an
Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere
in Canada or theUnited States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by thedealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0 Name and home address
0 Telephone number and location from which you
are calling
0 Location, license plate number and color of your
GMC truck
Mileage of vehicle and description of problem
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week, 365 days a year, including weekends and
holidays. Should you have any questions about roadside
assistance, call the GMC Roadside Assistance Center or
contact your dealer.
Roadside Assistance isnot part of or included in the
coverage provided bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any
time without notification.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
GMC Commitment Plus offers courtesy transportation
for customers when obtaining warrantyservice.
This program is offered in conjunction with the
3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) Bumperto Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Courtesy transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride from the dealership (up to
10 miles (16 km)) for same-day warranty repairs.
0
0
All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be
administered by your GMC dealership service
management. All requests should reflect actual costs
up to and not to exceed the maximum allowable
dollar limits.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical
to rent vehicles to people under 21 yearsof age. If
you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle,
GMC will reimburse upto $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
The Commitment Plus Courtesy Transportation Program
A loaner vehicle will be made available for overnight
is not part of the Bumperto Bumper Limited Warranty.
warranty repairs upto a five day maximum,or up to a
GMC reserves the rightto make any changesor
$30 allowance fora rental vehicle, cab,bus or other
discontinue the Courtesy Transportation Program at any
transportation in lieu of a loaner. (Bringing vehicles in
time without notification.
late in the day, for service on the next day,
does not
For additional program details contact your GMC dealer.
constitute overnight repairs.)
In Canada, please consult yourGM dealer for
Gas allowance of up to $10 a day for rides provided
information on Courtesy Transportation.
by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in
lieu of rental for overnight warranty repair to
up
five day maximum.
8-8
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information bookletfor
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motorsreserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both GMC and your GMC dealer are committed to
making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if
a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Toassist in resolving these
disagreements, GMC voluntarily participates in BBB
AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau systemto
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge tocustomers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are notsatisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write themat the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the natureof your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age andmileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure beforeyou resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearingwill
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept thedecision, GM will be
bound by that decision. Theentire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarilytake about 40 days from the
time you file a claim yntil a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration
program or in the courts. For further information,
contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the GMC
Customer AssistanceCenter at I-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782).
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes witha separate warranty booklet
that contai.ns detailed warranty information.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could
cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may [email protected]
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defectexists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer
or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from theHotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K1 G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) or write:
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario Ll H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
GMC Consumer Relations
31 E. Judson Street 1607-04
Pontiac, MI 48342-2230
8-11
1997 GMC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle canbe purchased by fillingc
the Service Publication Order
Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information
to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 GMC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about t
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenanc
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 5.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications are available for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
THE FOLLOWING PAGE ANDMAIL TO:
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discove
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
1-800-782-4356
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX
Orders
Only
1-31
3-865-5927
against
the
original
order.
VEHICLE MODEL
PUBLICATION FORM
PRICE
TOTAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUM8ER
NAME
YEAR
PRICE
EACH*
ORDER TOLL FREE
%
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
Manual
Service
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1997
$40.00
$1 1997
5.00
1997
$10.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
ChecK or money
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Order payable to
Mail completed order form to:
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
only do not send cash.)
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please write to the above addressfor quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S
(ATTENTION)
NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
0
AREA CODE
IC-ORD97 ’(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.)
P
A 0Mastercard
Y
VISA
M
Discover
E Account
Number:
N Expiration
Date rndyr:
T
Note to Canadian Customers:
m
MATERIAL
I TOTAL
I
I
MichiganPurcihaers
add 6% sales tax
m
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
lI
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
All listed prices are quotedin US. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable inUS. funds. To cover Canadian postage,add $11 50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
h
l NOTES
8-14
Section 9 Index
Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 I
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 1
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
1-25
How i t Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25. 2-67
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-27
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bag Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-57, 2-68
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check
. . . . . . . . 7-46
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-78
6-57
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
6-29
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72. 4.7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
AppearanceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
6-68
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
ArmrestStorageCompartment
....................
2-57
2-59
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-46
6-21
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-48
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
6-28
Axle. Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle. Locking Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
6-26
Axle. Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Replacement.Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
5.3. 5.5
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBBAutoLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
9-1
6-58
Label
Brake
Adjustment ..................................
6-38
Tire
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-35
Master Cylinder ..............................
Parking .....................................
2-27
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
System Warning Light .........................
2-71
4-54
Trailer ......................................
Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Wear .......................................
6-37
4-7
Brakes, Anti-Lock ...............................
Braking ........................................
4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...........................
4-9
2- 10
Break-In, New Vehicle ..........................
7-47
BTSICheck ...................................
6-39
Bulb Replacement ..............................
8-7
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
Capacities and Specifications ......................
6-76
2.32.4.40
CarbonMonoxide .........................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
...................................
Cargo
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
7-45
3.9.3.12
Cassette Tape Player ........................
3-25
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
Cassette/Compact Disc Storage ....................
2-57
Center Overhead Console ........................
2-52
Center Passenger Position ........................
1-32
.............................. 4-4 1
Certification
4-41
Certificationire Label ..........................
9-2
Chains.Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
...................................
Chains.
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
2-69
Charging System Light ..........................
Check Gages Light ..............................
2-77
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Chemical Paint Spotting ..........................
6-67
Child Restraints ................................
1-43
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . 1-48. 1-50
Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . 1-54. 1-57
1-47
TopStrap ...................................
WheretoPut ...........................
1-45. 1-46
6-65
Chrome Wheels. Cleaning .........................
2-59
CigaretteLighter ...............................
6-71
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-19
Cleaner. Air ...................................
Cleaning
6-65
Aluminum Wheels ............................
Exterior LampsLenses ........................
6-64
Fabric ......................................
6-60
6-63
Glass .......................................
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
6-60
6-63
Instrumentpanel .............................
Leather .....................................
6-62
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-64
Special Problems .............................
6-61
6-61
Stains ......................................
6-66
Tires .......................................
Vinyl .......................................
6-62
Wheels .....................................
6-65
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.3
Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
6-26
Clutch Fluid. Hydraulic ..........................
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
ComfortGuides.Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
3-26
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 16. 3-20
Compact Disc Player .......................
Compass. Rearview Mirror with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2-55
Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14
5-15
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5- 13
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2-54. 2-55
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users. . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
6-66
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
2-44
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 10
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogger.RearWindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Defogging and Defrosting .........................
3-6
[email protected] Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-46
Door
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
StoragePocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-21
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-27
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
4-35
4-37
OnSnowandIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
4-3
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E a s y Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14. 3-24. 6-70
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10. 6-12
6-29
Coolant .....................................
Coolant Heater ...............................
2- 14
7-45
Coolant Level Check ..........................
Coolant Temperature Gage .....................
2-72
6-78
Cooling System Capacity .......................
2-32
Exhaust .....................................
FuseBlocks ............................
6-71, 6-73
6-69
Identification ................................
7-45
OilLevelCheck ..............................
5-11
Overheating .................................
Running While Parked .........................
2-32
6-76
Specifications ................................
StartingYour ................................
2-13
Underhood Fuse/Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6-15
Engineoil ....................................
Adding .....................................
6-15
Additives ...................................
6-18
6-15
Checking ...................................
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
6-18
Used .......................................
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Exhaust. Engine ................................
2-32
6-60
Fabric Cleaning ...............................
Fan Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3.3
Fender Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
FillingYourTank ................................
6-5
9-4
Filter. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
6-64
Finish Care ....................................
6-66
Finish Damage .................................
5-2
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
6-78
Fluid Capacities ................................
Fluids and Lubricants ............................
7-51
2-45
Fog Lamps ....................................
6-4
Foreign Countries. Fuel ...........................
Four-wheel Drive .........................
2-22. 6-27..
French LanguageManual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
FrontAxle ....................................
6-28
2-23
Front Axle Locking Feature .......................
5-10
FrontTowing ..................................
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . 6-42. 6-43
Fuel ..........................................
6-3
6-5
Filling Your Tank ..............................
Gage .......................................
2-78
In ForeignCountries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-78
Tank Capacity ...............................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
6-71
6-71
FusibleLinks ..................................
bages
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Engine
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"
Fuel .......................................
Speedometer .................................
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter ...................................
2-72
2-75
2-78
2-65
2-65
2-70
Garage Door Opener ............................
2-52
4-41
GAWR .......................................
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15
Gear Positions. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19. 2-20
2-52
GloveBox ....................................
4-41
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
4-41..
Guide en Fransais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
Halogen Bulbs ................................
6-39
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
1-6
Head Restraints .................................
Headlamps ....................................
2-43
6.40.6.41
Bulb Replacement .......................
2-37
HigWLow Beam Changer ......................
OnReminder ................................
2-44
6-70
Wiring .....................................
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-4
Heating ........................................
2-37
High-Beam Headlamps ..........................
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
4-35
Tire
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
Hood
6-8
Checking Things Under .........................
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9
2-35
Horn .........................................
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ...........................
6-26
Hydroplaning ..................................
4-3 1
Ignition Positions ..............................
2-11
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
2-46
Illuminated Entry ...............................
6-51
Inflation. Tire ..................................
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
7-49
Inspections ....................................
7-50
Brake System ................................
7-50
DriveAxle ..................................
7-49
Exhaust Systems .............................
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
7-49
7-49
Steering ....................................
7-49
Suspension ..................................
7-49
Throttle Linkage ..............................
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Instrumentpanel ...............................
2-62
6-63
Cleaning ....................................
2-64
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-71
FuseBlock ..................................
Intensity Control .............................
2-46
2-46
Interior Lamps .................................
....................................
JJump
ack.
Starting ...................................
5-23
5-3
7-46
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
Key Release Button .............................
2-12
Keyless Entry System ............................
2-7
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
9-5
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 1
Certificationflire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 1
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-69
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
2-43
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47
Cargo ......................................
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
2-46
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
2-44
On Reminder ................................
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-29
2-59
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights
AirBagOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57. 2-68
Air Bag Readiness .......................
1-25. 2-67
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72. 4-7
2-71
Brake System Warning .........................
ChargingSystem .............................
2-69
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Safety Belt Reminder .....................
1 - 10, 2-67
Service Engine Soon ..........................
2-73
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22.2-76
Loading Information. Truck-Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-41
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . 4- I5
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Locks
7-46
Cylinders ...................................
9-6
Door ........................................
2-5
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-46
KeyLock Cylinders Service ....................
2-6
PowerDoor ..................................
2-6
Rear Door Security .............................
7-51
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-47
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
LumbarControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
MaintenanceRecord ............................
7-54
Maintenance Schedule ............................
7-1
Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals .....................
7-6
Owner Checks and Services .....................
7-45
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Short Trip/City Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ........................
7-5
6-67
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-73
1-2
ManualFrontSeat ...............................
2-51
ManualMirror .................................
Manual Transmission
7-46
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
2- 19. 2-20
Shifting ................................
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-33
Manualwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-56. 2-58
Memo Pad Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
2-48
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Inside Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2-51
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
vi
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
N e w Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- I O
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 14
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2-65
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 14
Off-RoadDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- I 1
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Opener. Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5- 1 I
Owner Checks and Services .......................
7-45
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- I I . 8- 12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
Park. Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park. Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
2-28
2-30
2-10
2-27
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Over Things That Burn ........................
PassengerPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
4-12
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Power
AccessoryOutlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
2-6
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Driver’sSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptionFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
2-51
Remote Control Mirror ........................
4-9
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take-0 ff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Pregnancy, Useof Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-59
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1 , 8- 12
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Pressure Cap ...........................
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain, Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
6-32
3-23
3-7
4-29
2-46
9-7
Rocking Your Vehicle ........................... 5-35
Rear
Roof
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - ' 6 - 2 6 Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement .............. 6-47
Rotation. Tires .................................6-52
DoorSecurityLocks ...........................
2-6
Outside Seat Position .....................
1-34, 1-37
1-40
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
s a f e t y Belt Extender ............................ 14-55
Seatpassengers ,............................. l-34
Safety Belts ....................................
1-9
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
WindowDefogger .............................
3-6
Adults .........,............................ l-15
Care ....................................... 6-63
RearSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9
Center
Passenger Position ......................
1-32
Rearview Mirror ................................
2-48
Electrochromic Daymight ......................
2-48
Children .................................... 1-43
Driver
Position ...............................
2-48
Inside Daymight .............................
1-15
1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ..............................
1-65
Extender ....................................
How to Wear Properly ......................... 1-15
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 1
Incorrect Usage ....................
1-17? 1-63, 1-64
RecoveryHooks ................................
5-35
Recovery Tank, Coolant ..........................
5- 15
Lap Belt .................................... 1-32
6-78
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
Lap-Shoulder ...................... 1-15. 1-34. 1-37
Larger Children ..............................
1-62
Replacement
............................
Passenger
Position
1-23
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39, 6-75
Questions and Answers ........................
1-14
6-77
Parts .......................................
Rear Comfort Guides ..........................
1-40
Wheel ......................................
6-57
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ....... 1-34. 1-37
Replacing Safety Belts ...........................
1-65
1-34
Rear
Seat Passengers ..........................
8- 10
Reporting Safety Defects .........................
1-10, 2-67
Reminder Light ..........................
Restraints
1-65
Replacing After a Crash ........................
Checking ................................... l-65
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 1-23
Child .......................................
1-43
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ................... 1-16
Head ........................................ l-6
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
1-43
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Use
During
Pregnancy
.........................
1-22
System Check ................................
7-46
Why They Work .............................. 1-11
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
1-23
Roadside Assistance ..............................
8-5
Safety Chains .................................. 4-54
Roadside Assistance. Canadian .....................
8-7
9-8
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8- 10
...
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
111
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-4
1-6
Seatback. Latches ................................
1-4
Seatbacks. Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats
1-7
EasyEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Driver’s ................................
1-3
Power Lumbar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8. 1.9
I .1
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatcontrols .................................
1-2
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint . . 1.48.1.50.1.52.1.54.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54. 1-57
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8. 12
EngineSoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8. 12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-69
Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8. 12
6-2
Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Appearance Care ......................
6- 1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 1. 8- 12
Service Publications ........................
8- 1 1. 8. 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
SheetMetalDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15.2.19. 2.20
Shift Light ...............................
2.22.2.76
Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
2-28
Shifting Into Park (P) ............................
Shifting. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19. 2-20
2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ..........................
1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .....................
Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
2-37
SignalingTurns ................................
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
3-24
Sound Equipment. Adding ........................
6-76
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-76
Specifications. Engine ...........................
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
7-44
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
4-9
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
VariableEffort ................................
2-36
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step-BumperPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-61
2-52
StorageAreas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Storage. Overhead ..............................
Storage. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
2-61
Sunvisors ....................................
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
v
Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
I
9-10
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Turn SignalNultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underhood FuseRelay Center .....................
6-67
6-73
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
DamageWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
IdentificationNumber .........................
6-69
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
6-39
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
VentilationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visors, Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-61
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
8- 10
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
6-33
WashingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Wheel
6-57
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut Torque .............................
5.30.6.76
6-57
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
2-33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
Sliding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Fluid ..................................
2-39, 6-33
Fluid Level Check ............................ 7-45
2-38
Windshield Wipers ..............................
BladeReplacement ......................
6-49. 6-77
Cleaning the Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
6-70
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
6-63
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-70
Wiring.Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrench. Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
9-11
Service Station Checkpoints
ENGINE COOLANT
RECOVERY TANK
P5-13 and 6-29*
P5-3
BATTERY
and 6-39
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
P6-15*
\
I F
I1
TIRES
P6-50
//<
j;-
{
/,
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
P6-9
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-33
I
HOOD RELEASE
P6-9
FUEL DOOR
P6-5
For detailed information, referto the page numberlisted, or see the Indexin the back of the owner’s manual.
* For vehicles equipped withdiesel engines, see the Diesel Engine Supplement.
9-12
iI
1
X9704
4
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement